Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

scope. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work.rte.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. the floor or roof remains connected. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. construction. You learn the terminology. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. drawings. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. every drawing sheet. and open Metric\Templates. click Training Files. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. 13 Click OK. drawing sheets. review the Revit Architecture templates. For most tutorial projects. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. how to navigate the user interface. and customize the project as necessary. In this case. quantities. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and plans. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. the hierarchy of elements. 12 Select DefaultMetric. sections. If the length of the elevation is changed. hence. If you move the partition. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . As you work in drawing and schedule views. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. schedules. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. and click Open. and phases when you need it. the door retains this relationship to the partition. In this case. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. In the Revit Architecture model. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. and schedules required for a building project. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. the operation of the software is parametric. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the parameter is one of association or connection. 2D and 3D view. and residential. you will use the default template. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work.

For example. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. doors. and keynotes are annotation elements. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. and roofs are model elements. doors. They help to describe or document the model. dimensions. tags. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. For example. and 2D detail components. For example. Examples include detail lines. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. windows. walls. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. For example. Datum elements help to define project context.When you change something. For example. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. If you can draw. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. programming is not required. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. and reference planes are datum elements. grids. levels. Understanding the Basics | 7 . For example. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. tags. windows. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. dimensions. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. filled regions. and cabinets are model components. They display in relevant views of the model. walls and roofs are hosts. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

This information includes components used to design the model. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects.In Revit Architecture. In other cases. To place levels. you must be in a section or elevation view. and types. However. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. you do nothing to establish these relationships. and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. families. Project: In Revit Architecture. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. you can explicitly control them. such as roofs. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. Most often. floors. top of wall. for example. elevation views. schedules. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. from geometry to construction data. By using a single project file. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. first floor. and ceilings. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. and drawings of the design. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. Often. or bottom of foundation. views of the project. section views. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. for example. The project file contains all information for the building design. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views.

making it easy to understand what each button represents. ceilings. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). dimensions. In the steps that follow. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. For example. A type can be a specific size of a family. and similar graphical representation. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. For example. the user interface is labeled. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. However. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. System families can be transferred between projects. floors. In the following illustration. A type can also be a style. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. System families include walls. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. roofs. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. identical use. categories of model elements include walls and beams. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. ■ Type: Each family can have several types. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . learning Revit Architecture is much easier.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. For example. specifically its clear user interface. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). and levels. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions.

The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. This creates a new project based on the default template. By default. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. click (New). The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. which are listed on the menu. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. you type the required key combination to perform the command. The toolbar buttons represent common commands. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. Many of the commands have shortcut keys. For example. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . Edit. While working in the drawing area. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. and View. Click View menu ➤ Zoom.

a door type is specified. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. 9 In the Type Selector. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. when you add a door. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . On the left side of the Options Bar. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. When you select the Door tool. For example.

The Show Design Bars dialog displays. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. immediately below the Type Selector.■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. In the drawing area. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. containing buttons grouped by function. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface.

In the Project Browser. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu. click the tab in the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. The respective commands display on the Design Bar.11 Click OK. select Views (all).

windows). and groups. walls. families. To open a view. The browser is dockable. reports. and rename views. and group name. delete. 3D). scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. family category (doors. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans. sheets. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. elevations. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. double-click its name. families. schedules. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet.

you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Do not click. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click Cancel. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. The cursor displays as a pencil. In this case. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. click Wall." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. In the bottom left corner of the window. After creating a browser organization scheme. the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next.

You can select a topic on the Contents tab. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. It highlights when the cursor is over it. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. click Modify to end the Wall command. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. Windows: From any window. Toolbar: From the toolbar. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. The status bar also provides information. In the status bar. regarding selected elements in a view. 20 Press TAB. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. If no Help button displays. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. You can also press SHIFT+F1.18 On the Design Bar. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. press F1 for help. click on the Standard toolbar. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. When you place the cursor over an element. There are several tools that help you find information. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. Tooltips: To see tooltips. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. in conjunction with tooltips. find a keyword on the Index tab. press F1 for context-sensitive help. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. Click the Help button. After you are familiar with these tasks. You can use this tri-pane. In addition. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 .

In the drawing area. For example. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. the view zooms out from the building model.rvt. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In the following steps. 5 On the View toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. There are several ways to access zoom options. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window.

The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. 10 To display SteeringWheels. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. To modify or add snap increments. 7 Click in the drawing area. If you do not have a wheel mouse. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. the view zooms in on the selected area. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. on the View toolbar. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. When you release the mouse button. . 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window. As you move the mouse. use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. this is referred to as a crossing selection. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. NOTE As you zoom in and out. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area.

referred to as shape handles. Similar controls. When drawing or modifying a building model. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. and double-click 2nd Flr. and click the SteeringWheels tab. bottoms. 15 To exit the wheel. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. and then using the Zoom tool again. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. Small blue dots. as shown. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. display along the ends. press ESC. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . expand Views (all). You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. and click Help. click Settings menu ➤ Options. moving the wheel to the desired location.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. These are the drag controls. 17 Type ZR. Cnst. For more information about SteeringWheels. called drag controls. and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. To define settings for SteeringWheels. and select the wall.

In this case. as shown. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 23 Click next to the lower wall. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. After selecting the element to move. click to specify the starting position. and click again to specify the ending position. and on the Tools toolbar. 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. The table moves down.18 Click and drag the left control. you want to move the table closer to the wall. for example. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table. to lengthen the wall. such as Move and Copy. Some commands. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. click (Move).

click the Undo command. and click again to end it. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . click Lines. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. In this example. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. All changes you make to a project are tracked. such as the Lines command. Move. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Some commands. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. select the second item in the list. or press CTRL+Z. on the Standard toolbar. 24 Select the plant. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). The table and plant are returned to their original locations.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 26 On the Undo menu. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. and drag it on top of the table.

30 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . click Modify.29 To end the command. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. Press ESC twice. On the Design Bar.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. or referenced as a drafting view. and annotate building assemblies. In Revit Architecture. NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. detail. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. When you have finished these tutorials. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view. Use detail components to define an assembly.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. In this tutorial. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view. but for training purposes. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. illustrating how building components work together. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. 27 .

If necessary. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. you will create a drafting view. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. and reference a drafting view. for Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. click Training Files. scroll until the folder is displayed. create a reference callout. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected.rvt. click Drafting View. enter Window Head Detail. import a DWG detail. 3 In the Scale list. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise.

9 Type ZR.In the Project Browser. 6 In the Colors field list. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser.dwg. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. and click Open. as shown. The model zooms out.). select Black and White. The drawing area is still blank. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. located directly to the left of the drawing area. displaying the extents of the detail. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model. click Training Files. 10 In the drawing area. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass.

The view displays to the specified area. in the Type Selector. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail. to activate the view selection list. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 14 In the drawing area. click Callout. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. 12 On the Options Bar. and in the Scale list. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. select Detail View: Detail. 13 Click Reference other view.

16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view.rvt. 3 In the drawing area. select Detail View: Detail. double-click the reference callout tag head.The reference callout is created. c_express_workshop_details_start. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. select Callout. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. adjust the detail view display settings. and in the Scale list. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. 2 On the Options Bar. in the Type Selector. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

click Modify to clear the selection. for Name. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. and click Rename. under Detail Views (Detail). 8 On the Design Bar. select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. and click OK. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. enter Wall Base 1. under Detail Views(Detail). 5 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Wall Base 1. 4 Right-click Detail 0.The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 6 In the drawing area.

11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions. Model-Based Detailing | 33 . 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. bordered by a solid line. This is the view crop region.The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area.

The model elements in the view display as half-tones. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click View Properties. 16 Click OK. 14 In the drawing area. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. 13 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Hide Crop Region). for Display Model. select As Underlay. under Graphics. right-click.12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown.

NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. and press ENTER. type 1' 6''. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. typical details can easily be placed. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. 17 On the View Control Bar. Stud. click Detail Components. Directly above the drawing area. If the crop region is enlarged. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. 19 In the Type Selector. 20 In the drawing area. click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. By grouping detail components. on the Options Bar. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly.Brick on Mtl. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail.

add the following detail components as shown. as shown. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. 25 In the Project Browser. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. expand Groups ➤ Detail. and click Create Instance. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 23 Using the same method.22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail.

28 Press ESC to end the command. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 . ■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation.4" Slab detail. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group.

map keynotes by material. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. 4 On the Options Bar. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. and format keynote styles. Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element. consistent means of identifying building assembly components. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. or instructions within a construction documentation package. c_express_workshop_details_start. click Training Files. and verify that Horizontal. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Keynote ➤ Element. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. for Full Path. in the type selector. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Leader. special notes. For more information about customizing a keynote database. click Browse. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. and Free End are selected. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. You can customize this list.txt. and under Keynote Table. In the next exercise. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions.

6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties.5 In the drawing area. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. Keynoting | 39 . use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. 7 Click to place the leader arm. a question mark displays. Either move the text inside. If no value has been specified. 9 Press ESC to end the command. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area. 8 Click to place the tag. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . or increase the size of the annotation crop region.

16 In the drawing area.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. 13 Click to place the tag. 12 Click to place the leader arm. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. You will now change all keynotes to keys only. click Keynote ➤ Material. and click OK.A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 15 Select 07 21 00. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail.

Click OK. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. legends. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. Only the keynotes remain selected. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson.Boxed. Select Keynote Tags.All items within the selection display in red. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. 17 On the Options Bar. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . Click Check None. 19 In the Type Selector. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection.

this tutorial uses imperial units only. Update drawing sheet and project information. you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. Place views on drawing sheets. In this exercise. and modify and update the project sheet title block. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. you will create a sheet. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. Add labels to a title block. In this lesson. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. update the project information element properties. but for training purposes. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet.

3 Click OK. click Training Files. If necessary. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). Project Sheet Layout | 43 .rvt. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. In the Project Browser. The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. scroll until the folder is displayed. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. or in the element properties of the title block. In Revit Architecture. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

In this tutorial. 7 Enter K. Click OK. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. hold down the wheel and drag. you can enter ZE to zoom out. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. roll the wheel. enter Sections/Details. 8 On the Design Bar. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. double-click Checker. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. 9 In the Project Browser. To zoom in and out. and click Rename. right-click A602 . under Sheets(all). Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. click Modify to clear the selection. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. For Name. To pan. Smith and press ENTER. Then. 6 In the Title Block. or in the project information Element Properties dialog.4 Type ZR. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 5 In the drawing area. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block.Unnamed. enter A602.

13 Click OK. click Text. select the title block. For Client Name. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown.11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter J. in the Type Selector. Smith. select Text : 1/8''. The Family Editor opens. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. Project Sheet Layout | 45 . enter Freighthouse Flats. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. 15 In the Options Bar. enter Design Development. For Project Status. (Left) is selected. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. 17 On the Design Bar. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. 20 Click and type Project Status. 18 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter 4/10/2008. For Project Name. 16 Type ZR.

as shown. 22 Using the same method. 23 On the Design Bar. add Project Issue Date parameter. under Category Parameters. click (Load into Project).21 On the Design Bar. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. and click OK. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. and click. as shown. to add 28 Using the same method. select Label : 3/16''. 29 On the Design Bar. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. and verify that (Top) are selected. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. click Label. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. click Modify to exit the command. in the Type Selector.

click Browse. select Override parameter values of existing types. to a drawing sheet. you will create. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . for Name. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. for Full Path. enter Keynote Legend . Next you will create. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet.Project. a viewport displays.30 In the Reload Family dialog. place and modify a keynote legend. and click Yes. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. click Training Files.txt. representing the view or schedule. and under Keynote Table. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project.

under Sheets (all). clear Show Headers. as shown. and click OK. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Sections/Details. on the Appearance tab. and drag Keynote Legend . expand Legends. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. 8 In the Project Browser. under Text. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. double-click A601 .5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog.

The keynote legend is visible. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection.9 Press ESC to clear the selection.Project as shown. 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown.

Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. expand Detail Views (Detail). 16 In the Element Properties dialog. for View Name. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. under Legends. enter Keynote Legend .14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown. click Edit. as shown. select Filter by sheet. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display. and click OK. at the bottom of the Filter tab.Project. The Keynote Legend is now blank. and click Properties. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. right-click Keynote Legend . 15 In the Project Browser.Sheet. and click OK. 19 Click OK twice. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . for Filter. not keynotes.

Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. The view remains selected. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . under Sheets (all). and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing. as shown.The keynote legend is automatically updated. and then add and update a Drawing list. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet.Title Sheet 1. Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. The view title with line displays below the viewport. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. double-click A0 .

The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. by default. define the information to include in a view title. You can specify text attributes for view titles. and zoom in on the drawing list. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. 6 Type ZR. The drawing list remains selected. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Press ESC to clear the selection. As part of a construction document set. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. 5 In the Project Browser. Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list.When you place a view on a sheet. Revit Architecture displays a view title. expand Schedules/Quantities. 3 In the Type Selector. or omit view titles from sheets. as shown.

clear Appears In Drawing List. and click OK. The drawing list display is updated. while pressing SHIFT. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. 8 In the Project Browser. select A602 .Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them. and click Properties.Sections/Details and select A801 .Ceiling Plans. under Identity Data. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . including only sheets that contain views. under Sheets (all). right-click the selected sheets.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. For example. it is good practice to test the constraints. If the grid moves. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. As you develop the building design. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. the wall or column will move with it. a central service core. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. After the beginning exercises.Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. a curtain wall. 57 . a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them.

you will use the default template. click Training Files. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. In practice. notice four elevation markers. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. East. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. In the drawing area in the right pane. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. South. click New. The new project opens. For this project. and residential. from the product library. The project is stored as a single file. 5 Click OK. construction. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Browse. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. In views that display elevation markers. views. 3 Under Template file. you use a template that is provided with the software. under Projects. and settings. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. under Create new. select Project. 2 In the New Project dialog. locate the Project Browser. you design inside the elevation markers.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file.rte. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. Creating the Project In this exercise. West. you load any required family type that is not in your project. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. such as a door or window. verify that the second option is selected. with an RVT extension. and customize the project as necessary. To create the project file. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. but contains no geometry. levels. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow.

Schedules/Quantities. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. double-click South. content and building model reports. notice the Legends. and elevation views created in the project by the template. These views are customizable: you can rename them. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. view the Save reminder interval. change their properties. Groups. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. enter Revit Retail Building. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. 8 Under Floor Plans. reflected ceiling plan views. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. and other properties. then expand Floor Plans. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). as well as change their names. sheets. 7 If necessary. 16 Click Save. verify that Project Files (*. will be accessible from the Project Browser. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. Sheets (all). Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. and duplicate levels. such as schedules and legends. 13 In the file window. and Elevations (Building Elevation). 15 For Save as type. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. expand Views (all). duplicate them. 10 In the Project Browser. heights.rvt) is selected. and delete them. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). and families in your project. Creating the Project | 59 . and click Training Files. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. created by the template. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. You can add. the view you see in the drawing area.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. schedules. double-click Metric. NOTE If you create a project without a template. 14 For File name. As you design and document your building model. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. Ceiling Plans. and on the General tab. you will want to save your work frequently.The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. Two level lines. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. delete. display in the south elevation. Families.

3 Double-click the Level 1 text. so that when one level moves. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and double-click South. and press ENTER. After you modify the two default levels.17 Proceed to the next exercise. doors. expand Views (all). the other levels move and change with it. and windows within the building model. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. to each other. You learn how the levels are locked. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. or constrained. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. When you begin designing. enter 00 Foundation. Adding Project Levels on page 60. You change the names of the 2 default levels.

13 On the Options Bar. As you move the cursor. enter 01 Entry Level. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. right-click. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. 5 In the Project Browser. Adding Project Levels | 61 . Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. not all the tabs are visible. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. enter -1800. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. enter 0. and then move it up. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. and press ENTER. 16 Enter 3750. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. and press ENTER. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. Next. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. view the Design Bar. click Level. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. This is the Options Bar. If it does not. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. and press ENTER. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. and click OK. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. which should display by default. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. When you add the new level. By default. and press ESC. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. and click Basics. 14 Click Plan View Types.

23 On the Options Bar. or on the Design Bar. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. and enter 02 Level. and move it slightly upward. If you create a level by copying it. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. 25 Click to place the level line. 21 In the Project Browser. enter 3750. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well.18 In the Project Browser. using a different option. 19 Click OK. 26 Press ESC. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. click Modify to end the command. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you add another level. and for Offset. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. under Floor Plans. and rename the corresponding views. click (Pick Lines). the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. Next. right-click Level 3. click Rename. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. click Level.

all the levels move. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. as shown. If you select a level and click its lock. the levels are no longer constrained. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. Adding Project Levels | 63 . The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Column Grid on page 64.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. Notice that by moving the top level. and you can move them independently. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line.

4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. On the Design Bar. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. click Grid. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. 3 On the Options Bar. In the following exercise. select (Draw). until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. specify a start point for the grid line. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. click Modify.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. 64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Move the cursor up. so that if the roof elevation changes. and specify the grid line endpoint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. the column height changes as well. When the grid is complete. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. In a later exercise.

On the Options Bar. click (Pick Lines). enter 7500 mm. On the Options Bar. and click to place the line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . Enter A. and press ENTER. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. for Offset. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. for Offset. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. click Grid. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. enter 7500 mm. enter 4500 mm. Next. and click to place the line. and click to place the line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. and for Offset. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. Click to place the grid line.

66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . as shown. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. click Grid. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. click Grid. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. and specify the grid line endpoint. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm.8 Press ESC. 11 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E.

click Dimension. 14 On the Options Bar. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. select grid lines C and 3. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. 15 Starting with grid line A. 21 Press ESC twice. 22 While pressing CTRL. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. click (Aligned). 18 On the Design Bar.

click Modify. By pinning these central grid lines. 33 On the Design Bar. until it is closer to grid line 5. enter 50mm. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar.5mm Bubble with Gap. At the left endpoint of the grid line. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. 31 For End Segments Length. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select grid line 5. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. until it is closer to grid line A. 24 Press ESC. 29 In the Name dialog. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. and press ESC. and press ESC. and click OK. enter 6. click . click Duplicate. 32 Click OK twice. If necessary. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. click Modify. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. and on the Options Bar. The pins are hidden. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. and select None. click the value for Center Segment. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. Two pins display on the grid lines. click Edit/New. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. click and drag the blue circular grip up. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. 26 In the drawing area. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. and select grid line A. (Element Properties).

select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC. 39 In the Type Selector. Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. and in the Type Selector. Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 35 In the Type Selector. 37 Select the grid lines again.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. click Structural Column. and press ESC. select Grid : 6. click (Grid Intersection).5mm Bubble with Gap. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. The original continuous grid lines are restored. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. click Finish. select all of the grid lines. For Place By. 36 On the Design Bar. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red).5mm Bubble. select Grid : 6.

If it is unlocked. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. Next. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. select 01 Entry Level. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. double-click 01 Entry Level. 52 On the Options Bar. select grid line A. 47 Enter 9000. click Camera. click Activate Dimensions. 45 While pressing CTRL. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and unlock it. lock it. 46 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. for From. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. 48 On the Standard toolbar. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. 43 Press ESC.

and click to place the target point of the camera. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. Creating a Column Grid | 71 .

Adding Beams In this exercise. displays in bold under 3D Views. When you finish adding beams. and click Rename. enter To Building. Right-click 3D View 1. ■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . expand 3D Views. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. The current view. named 3D View 1 by default. In the Rename View dialog. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. under Views (all). and click OK. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. Adding Beams on page 72. and then copy them to subsequent levels.

click Beam. 8 While pressing CTRL. under 3D Views. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. view the icons on the View Control Bar. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select each grid line. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . 4 Click Medium. click (Create Beam On Grid). 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. the icon on the right side of the scale. 9 On the Options Bar. The view is currently set to Coarse. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Project Browser. The selected grid lines display as red. click Finish. double-click 01 Entry Level. 7 On the Options Bar. Adding Beams | 73 . which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. 6 In the Type Selector.

under Floor Plans. press and hold SHIFT.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. 14 Select one of the beams. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. select 02 Level. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 12 On the View toolbar. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. click (Default 3D View). Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. and click Select All Instances. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. select 06 Roof. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click OK. right-click. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines.

resize the view to see the entire structure. view the Top Level parameter. right-click. click 24 Press ESC. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 06 Roof. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. and if necessary. and click OK.to the 5th level. double-click To Building. Adding Beams | 75 . select 06 Roof. under Instance Parameters. All of the columns display as red. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. 20 Click Cancel. for Top Level. and click Select All Instances. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. 25 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. right-click. 21 With the column selected. 22 On the Options Bar. and click Element Properties. When you created the columns. (Element Properties). under Constraints.

Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. but you want to display them in less detail. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. double-click South. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. under Elevations. 28 Save the drawing. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . as lines only. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

Adding Braces | 77 . verify that Attach to Grid is selected. To better add the braces to the structure. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.29 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. click Framing Elevation. Adding Braces In this exercise. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. Adding Braces on page 77. and press ESC to end the command. double-click 00 Foundation. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. you create 8 framing elevation views. 4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. under Floor Plans.

press ESC twice. After you add the final brace. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . NOTE Do not copy or array braces. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. The associated framing elevation view displays. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. 8 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Design Bar. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. 6 Select the crop region (if necessary). add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. click Brace. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. double-click the elevation marker arrow. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. but when placed the braces are placed. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. click to specify the start point of the brace. and when the endpoint snap displays. 11 Using the same technique. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid.

Adding Braces | 79 . and press ENTER. The height of the roof lowers. delete it and redraw it. enter 18000 mm. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height.

double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. under Floor Plans. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. double-click 00 Foundation. but this time add them from right to left. enter 10000 mm. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. and press ENTER. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Standard toolbar. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid.

Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. 19 In the Project Browser. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. under Floor Plans. Adding Braces | 81 . click Activate Dimensions. NOTE As you add braces. enter 12000 mm. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. as shown in the 3D view below. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). and press ENTER. 23 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. 21 Select grid line A. and on the Options Bar.

grid size. Creating a Foundation on page 82. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. double-click 00 Foundation. and drag it away from the structure. click and roof height. lock it. (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. 31 Save the drawing. beams. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 28 On the Standard toolbar. under 3D Views. Test connectivity of the columns. under Elevations. double-click {3D}. under Floor Plans. 29 In the Project Browser. 26 In the Project Browser.24 In the Project Browser. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. and if necessary. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. double-click South.

7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. select Unlimited. under Extents. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. under Floor Plans. click Edit. for View Range. After you load the pile cap family. click Training Files. and expand Structural Foundations. In the Element Properties dialog. In the View Range dialog. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Level. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view.Before you can add the pile caps. and press ESC twice. Click OK twice. The pile cap has been added in the view. 9 Close the warning dialog.rfa. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). under View Depth. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. and how to load specific families into a project. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. expand Families. A warning displays. The foundation pile cap now displays. Creating a Foundation | 83 . click Foundation ➤ Isolated. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. and click View Properties. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. and drag it to the drawing area.

press ESC twice. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. under 3D Views. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . When the final pile cap is placed. and click Create Similar. 13 In the Project Browser.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap.

All columns in the building model display as red. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser.14 Close the file with or without saving it. you change the types of the columns. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You load new column. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. 2 Select one of the columns. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click {3D}. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. right-click.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and brace families into the project. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. under 3D Views. beam. beams. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. and braces that you used to create the building structure. and click Select All Instances. click Training Files.

select M_Round Bar: 75mm. 6 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. enter 75mm. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. click Modify. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. This not the size that you want to use. The building model displays the round hollow columns. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Duplicate. and click OK twice. but it is the only size of its type currently available. 15 In the Project Browser. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. right-click.5CHS.3 In the Type Selector. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. In the following steps. you change the brace type. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. The brace type changes. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. click Brace.9. 9 In the Type Selector. click (Element Properties). 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the Name dialog. click (Default 3D View). for d. select the braces in the elevation one by one. 19 On the Design Bar. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams.2X101. 10 On the Options Bar. under Dimensions. 7 On the Design Bar. for Type. enter 75mm. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. double-click Elevation 1-a. click Modify. and click OK.6X15. select M_Round Bar : 25mm. 17 While pressing CTRL. and changing its size parameter. 16 On the Design Bar. the braces as well as the beams change. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. 18 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Select All Instances.

2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. and click Open.rvt. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model. select m_RRB_structure_complete. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural.Origin to Origin. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Auto . Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file. 3 Under Positioning. click Training Files. After the files are linked. Linking the Structural Model on page 87. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 22 Proceed to the next exercise.

You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. however. click (Copy/Monitor). structural members. 9 In the drawing area. 8 On the Options Bar. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project. select Multiple. click Copy. depending on the project. and click Select Link.4 In the Project Browser. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 6 In the drawing area. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. under Elevations. Grids. select Levels 00 through 06. In this case. and walls could also be copy/monitored. 5 On the Tools toolbar. After the link is established. while pressing CTRL. select the linked Revit model. double-click South.

15 In the New Plan dialog. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . 18 Using the same method. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. click OK. while pressing SHIFT. for Floor Plan views.10 On the Options Bar. you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. and click Delete. First. delete the Level 2 floor plan. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. 16 Click OK. click Finish. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. click Finish mode. 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. right-click Level 1. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view.

right-click. 21 In the drawing area. 25 In the View Templates dialog. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. for Name. 20 In the drawing area. 26 In the Project Browser. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. double-click 00 Foundation. double-click 01 Entry Level.19 In the Project Browser. select the Topography : Surface. enter Floor Plans. right-click. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 24 In the New View Template dialog. under Floor Plans. and click OK. Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. under Floor Plans. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. click OK. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1.

Linking the Structural Model | 91 . 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. under Names. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. 34 In the 3D view that displays. select Floor Plans. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. and click OK. click Camera. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid.

enter To Building. expand 3D Views. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. right-click 3D View 1. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor. Adding Floors on page 92. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors.rvt. Some other Revit Architecture elements. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 36 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. To create floors. In this exercise. and click Rename. and railings are also created from sketches. stairs. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. such as roofs. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building.35 In the Project Browser. Adding Floors In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Move the cursor to the left. On the Options Bar. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. Do not lock the dimension. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. select the top floor line. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. click Dimension. You are now in the Sketch Editor. On the Sketch tab. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. Adding Floors | 93 . and then the first horizontal grid line. Leave this dimension unlocked.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. click (Rectangle). and elements in the current view display as gray. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. click Floor. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. If the grid changes size. past the first vertical grid line. At the top left corner of the grid.

and change their values to 300 mm. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. At the top left corner of the grid. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and then press ESC. Enter 300. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. They display on the floor sketch. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. and click the temporary dimension value. Select and lock the dimensions. press ENTER. select the top floor line.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. click Modify. Do not lock the dimensions. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. Move the cursor to the left dimension.

Next. Adding Floors | 95 . ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line.8 Select the floor. and lock the dimensions. click Floor. and press ESC. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. and on the Options Bar. using a different sketching technique. enter 1500mm. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. click Lines. under Floor Plans. On the Sketch tab. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. Select the three remaining floor lines. double-click 02 Level. click Quit Sketch. On the Options Bar. click Edit. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. on the Design Bar. and for Offset. click (Pick Lines). and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown.

The 02 Level floor displays. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. click (Rectangle). The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. double-click 03 Level. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. click Lines. 16 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 18 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. Click the locks to constrain the floors. click (Align). and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. click Finish Sketch. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. click Floor. and a lock icon displays. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. 17 On the Sketch tab. 20 On the Tools toolbar.

and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 35 On the Sketch tab. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. under Floor Plans.24 On the Design Bar. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. click Edit. Alternatively. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. click Finish Sketch. and lock the edges. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. select 05 Roof Garden. under Views ➤ 3D Views. 31 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. double-click {3D}. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. double-click 01 Entry Level. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. and on the Options Bar. 32 Select the floor. Adding Floors | 97 . Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. click Finish Sketch.

5 Move the cursor over grid line E. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. ■ ■ For Offset. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. Click (Pick Lines). under Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding a Roof In this exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. enter 1800 mm. double-click 06 Roof. Adding a Roof on page 98. click Lines. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building.rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. click Training Files. When a blue dashed line displays. To create the roof. 3 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. click to place the roof line.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and press ENTER. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope.

9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). for Offset. Adding a Roof | 99 . 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). move the cursor slightly below the grid line. 7 On the Options Bar. enter 300 mm.6 Select grid line 5. click to place the roof line. and when the blue dashed line displays.

and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. click Finish Roof. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. ■ 12 On the Design Bar. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .10 Press ESC. click (Trim/Extend). Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. select the roof.

Adding a Roof | 101 . 15 On the Options Bar.14 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click (Add new points to the slab shape). for Elevation. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4. and click to specify the section. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. on grid D. click Section. enter -100 mm. move the cursor down below the roof. 17 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER.

28 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower).20 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Project Browser. for Structure [1]. 30 Click OK 3 times. In section. (Element Properties). click Edit/New. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. under Floor Plans. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. click Modify. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select Variable. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. for Structure. double-click 06 Roof. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. select the roof. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. and on the Options Bar. under Construction. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped.

Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. moving counter-clockwise. 33 In the warning dialog. select the section line. 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. click Modify. 37 If necessary. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. on the View Control Bar. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 40 In the Type Selector. and press DELETE. select each edge. select Fascia : Fascia .31 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. In this case. zoom in to the roof. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar.Roof Edge. Adding a Roof | 103 . click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. 41 Starting with the left front edge. click (Default 3D View). Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. click OK. 38 In the 3D view.

You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. double-click To Building. the curtain wall resizes with it. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. you add a curtain wall. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. under 3D Views. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .42 On the Design Bar. so if you resize the grid. click Modify.

8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click Wall. 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. click 01 Entry Level. click Edit/New. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK twice. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. click Training Files. enter 2100 mm. The type is saved in the project. enter Retail Storefront. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. under Floor Plans. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . For Offset. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. When you duplicate a type. for Spacing. Under Construction. select Horizontal Grid Continuous.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. For Level. for Type. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Name dialog. enter 600 mm. select 05 Roof Garden. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and move it slightly toward the building interior. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. for Join Condition. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. 3 In the Type Selector. select 01 Entry Level. for Spacing. click to place the first curtain wall segment. click Duplicate. enter 1050 mm. For Height.

If the grid moves.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click To Building. click (Trim/Extend). and lock the dimensions. Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. 15 On the View Control Bar. These dimensions are not in a sketch. and trim each curtain wall segment. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. so they remain in the view. you can delete the dimensions. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. under 3D Views. click Dimension. 13 On the Design Bar. the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. If you want to hide them.

and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating an Entrance on page 107. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating an Entrance | 107 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating an Entrance In this exercise.rvt.

and click None. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 2 On the View Control Bar. clear one element to clear all the elements. All the elements in the list are selected. under the element list. 5 Under Visibility.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. Do not select Columns. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 4 On the Model Categories tab. and double-click South. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. To better work with the curtain wall panels. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. 7 Click OK. under Views (all). click All. as these usually represent internal pilasters. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). in the center of the 01 Entry Level. 6 Under Visibility. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

18 On the View Control Bar. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. in the Type Selector. select Architectural Elevation. in this case an architectural elevation. press and hold CTRL. under 3D Views. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. Creating an Entrance | 109 . double-click {3D}. select System Panel : Solid. click Modify. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. 12 With the panels selected. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. and click OK. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 10 Select 1 panel.9 On the Design Bar. 16 On the View Control Bar. 17 In the Project Browser.

double-click To Building. under 3D Views. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 20 In the Project Browser. double-click South.19 In the Project Browser.

select another mullion to the right. and unpin it. 30 On the Design Bar. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. select One Segment. and click to select it. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 27 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Add or Remove Segments. click Curtain Grid. 32 In the Type Selector. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. Creating an Entrance | 111 . 24 On the Options Bar. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections).

and unpin it. click (Default 3D View). 36 Zoom in to the first panel. and view the new entrance. 34 On the View toolbar. select it. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. press TAB until it is selected. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 35 Zoom in to the front of the building.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels.

and add an entrance to the north side of the building. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. 39 Using the same process.38 Press DELETE. 40 Optionally. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. and 4th panels. remove the mullions from the 2nd. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . open the North elevation. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. 3rd.

114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Graphics.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. 5 Click OK. under Floor Plans. select 02 Level.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click in the view. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. double-click 01 Entry Level. for Underlay. and click View Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

8 Select the callout. which indicates you must draw the callout. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. click Callout. and click OK.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter Display Area. and click to complete the callout. The cursor changes to a pencil. 10 In the Rename View dialog. under Floor Plans. and click Rename. 9 In the Project Browser. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. select the grip closest to the callout head. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column.

and click Flip Section. right-click. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 Press ESC. as shown. 12 Draw a section line. click Section. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 16 Select the section box. 13 Select the section line. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level.

and click OK. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . right-click Section 1. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). select Wall faces. and click Rename. double-click 01 Entry Level. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. expand Sections (Building Section). for Prefer. 21 In the Type Selector. For Loc Line. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. click Dimension. click Wall. 24 On the Tools toolbar.135mm Partition (2-hr). 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Lock both alignments. 25 Press ESC twice.17 In the Project Browser. 26 On the Design Bar. Click (Rectangle). select Basic Wall : Interior . under Floor Plans. enter Section Display Area. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. select Finish Face: Exterior. 18 In the Rename View dialog. click (Align). and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. 27 On the Options Bar.

select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. under Ceiling Plans. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. under Sections (Building Section).) 36 Press ESC twice. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. double-click Section Display Area. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you modify them to be bulkhead walls. 38 On the View Control Bar. 37 In the Project Browser. Next. click Ceiling. and lock the dimension.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. and lock the dimension. 32 In the Type Selector. double-click 01 Entry Level. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting.

and click to select the walls. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 On the Options Bar. for Base Offset. On the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. click to select it. enter 2700 mm. and click (Element Properties). Select the 02 Level Floor. double-click Section Display Area. and click OK.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. for Height Offset From Level. under Constraints. click Modify. for Top/Base. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. 43 On the Design Bar. and press ESC. under Sections. 47 In the Project Browser. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. and click OK. press TAB until you select the wall chain. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Press ESC. enter 2700 mm. under Constraints. click (Element Properties). click Attach. and click to select the walls. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. under Ceiling Plans. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor.

120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog.49 In the Project Browser. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. view the ceiling structure. and click . click (Rotate). 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. click Cancel. 58 On the Edit toolbar. 54 Click OK. under Ceiling Plans. click Cancel. click Edit. for Structure. 59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. for Type. click Edit/New. under Construction. double-click 01 Entry Level.

enter 45.60 Click. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 . 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid. 61 Press ESC. and press ENTER.

66 Optionally. click Shadows Off. click Shadows On.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under 3D Views. 65 On the View Control Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. double-click To Building. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. 64 On the View Control Bar. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. and click to create a reference plane to the right. Move the cursor over grid line B.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Ref Plane. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines).Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. and for Offset. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. click Training Files. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. and click to create a reference plane to the left. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 . 3 On the Options Bar. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. enter 1500 mm. and copy it to the 05 Level.

8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Select the left reference plane. and 3. and specify a point to create first stair flight. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 2. click Stairs.5 On the Design Bar. C. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. click Modify. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. shorten the right reference plane. 7 Using the same method.

225mm Masonry. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. including its handrails. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. click Wall. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar. select Basic Wall : Generic . select Finish Face: Interior. Click (Rectangle). 12 In the Type Selector. Move the cursor down.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 . The complete stair displays. and specify a point. 10 On the Options Bar. and select the 2nd reference plane. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. beyond the end of the stair.

126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Dimension. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. select the dimension value. select Wall faces. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. and lock the alignment. enter 1200 mm. Click Modify. Select the bottom of the stair. for Prefer. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. click Align. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. Select the wall. Select the interior face of the wall. and specify a point away from the wall. 18 Using the same technique.15 On the Tools toolbar. and click to select it. Lock the dimension. and press ENTER. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments.

24 On the Standard toolbar. The stair and walls move to the left. (Undo). Because the dimension is constrained. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. a warning displays. 28 On the Options Bar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. click Door. TIP To flip the door swing.21 Select the dimension. clear Tag on Placement. 27 In the Type Selector. 25 While pressing CTRL. select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm. 23 Select the stair. select both reference planes. and press DELETE. and press DELETE.

You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. double-click 01 Entry Level. (Rectangle). 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. for Multistory Top Level. select all 4 walls. but if you view the top level of the building. and move the cursor to spin the building model. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . For Top Constraint. for Base Constraint. click 36 On the View toolbar. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. Click OK. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. (Element Properties). 33 Select the stair. click Align. 35 On the View toolbar. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). Under Constraints. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. (Default 3D View). Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. select 00 Foundation. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. Click OK.30 On the Design Bar. select 05 Roof Garden. click Modify. 44 On the Tools toolbar. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. (SteeringWheels). 40 Zoom in to the stairs. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). under Floor Plans.

51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 52 In the Select Levels dialog.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. and lock the alignment. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. on the View toolbar. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. and click OK. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. (SteeringWheels). and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary. click see the roof. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. click (Default 3D View). and lock the alignments. Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door.

select Up to Level: 06 Roof. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 56 Select the shaft. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. For Top Constraint. By offsetting the base. (Default 3D View). for Base Offset. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. under Floor Plans. click 59 On the View toolbar. Under Constraints. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest.55 In the Project Browser. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. enter 300 mm. (SteeringWheels). and click OK. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor.

Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. for Underlay. double-click 05 Roof Garden. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 . under Graphics. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Right-click in the view. select 06 Roof. click Wall.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. and click View Properties.rvt.

click Edit Profile. 16 On the Design Bar. click . enter 9750. The exact placement is not important. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements.5 In the Type Selector. and on the Options Bar. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. click (Align). select Elevation: South. 15 In the error dialog. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. and click (Fillet arc). 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select Basic Wall : Generic . and click Open View. and then select the right face of the wall. 11 In the Go To View dialog.225mm Masonry. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. 17 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. click Lines. click Remove Constraints.

23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. and click (Circle). as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. double-click {3D}. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar. click . 22 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc.18 In the upper right corner of the profile. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 .

you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134.

and open Metric\m_RRB_host. 5 On the Basics tab. click Training Files. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. double-click 05 Roof Garden. under Floor Plans. TIP After you place the 1st planter. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Component.4. as shown. 6 In the Type Selector. click Component. Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. select M_RPC Tree .rvt.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . select Planter : 1220 x 1220.5 Meters. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . between grid lines C and D. 3 In the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and press ESC twice.

17 While pressing CTRL. click Floor. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under 3D Views. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. and in the Type Selector. click (Default 3D View). 16 Click Apply. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Project Browser. double-click 05 Roof Garden. for Height. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 01 Entry Level. (Element Properties). select M_RPC Tree . select the 2 remaining trees. enter Japanese Cherry 1. under Floor Plans.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. and on the Options Bar. as shown. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. enter 1500 mm. enter 2400 mm. click Edit/New. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. 21 On the Design Bar. and then click OK twice. For Offset.5 Meters.5 Meters. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. for Type. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click {3D}. click Duplicate. click Lines. View the roof. 11 Select one of the trees.8 On the View toolbar. 14 In the Name dialog. under Floor Plans. under Dimensions.

28 Select the right vertical floor line. click (Draw). 29 On the Options Bar. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. enter 0 mm. and click to sketch a line. 27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. and click to sketch a line. 25 Using the same method. for Offset. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . 26 On the Options Bar. and click to place the line.23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5.

33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. move the cursor up 900 mm.30 On the Options Bar. 35 Select the line that you just drew. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. click (Trim/Extend). 31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. 32 Press ESC. and click to finish the line. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. and click to finish the line. clear Chain. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 34 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm.

as shown: (Element Properties). click Edit/New. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. 48 In the Type Selector. 45 Click OK. select Rotate after placement. a photorealistic image displays. 43 Click OK twice. under Constraints. In plan view. 49 On the Options Bar. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. for Type. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Sidewalk. for Height Offset from Level. and click so he is facing the column.38 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. When you render an image. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. near Column E5. enter -250 mm. click Finish Sketch. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. 39 Select the sidewalk. Next. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. click Component. select M_RPC Male : Alex. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. The completed sidewalk displays. 42 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 .

select M_RPC Female : Cathy. click the car. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. click Camera.NOTE If necessary. and click (Element Properties). 54 In the Type Selector. 56 Press ESC twice. 57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). select M_RPC Beetle. 52 In the Type Selector. about 30 degrees. and click to place her on the sidewalk. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

64 Select Alex. 63 Click the sidewalk. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. 65 Click the sidewalk. under Elevations. 60 In the Project Browser. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . under 3D Views. and on the Options Bar. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. click Pick Host. and on the Options Bar. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. Next. When you select a host for a component. If the sidewalk changes height. under Constraints. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. double-click West. enter -300 mm. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. and click OK. for Offset. 66 Using the same method. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. click Pick Host. double-click To Building. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components.59 In the Element Properties dialog.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. and replace them with a service core. After the service core is positioned. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. 142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Select the entire stairwell. 5 On the View toolbar.rvt. double-click 05 Roof Garden. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. (SteeringWheels). walls. click Training Files. under Floor Plans.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you delete the entire stairwell. 4 Press DELETE. click 6 On the View toolbar. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. including the stairs. click (Default 3D View). Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. and shaft opening. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden.

expand Groups.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. click OK. and notice that the linked file is listed. and open Metric\m_RRB_core. right-click m_RRB_core. and click Create Instance. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. click Modify. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation. click (Align). click Training Files. 11 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog.rvt. and on the Design Bar. 13 In the drawing area. expand Model. and zoom in to the linked instance. under Floor Plans. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2.

20 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Design Bar. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . 19 On the Design Bar. (SteeringWheels). (Default 3D View). click Ungroup. and click to align the center. click Modify.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. click 21 On the View toolbar. click (top down view). Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. 18 Select the core. or if the group layout is expected to change. ■ ■ Click grid line C.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you add glass railings around the floor edges. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. where it is hosted within a railing family. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. After you modify it. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_.rvt. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

under Floor Plans. The rendering displays. press and hold CTRL. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . click Edit.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. and expand Railings. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. expand Renderings. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. and open Metric\m_Conference. expand Families.rvt. click Training Files. 3 In the Conference project. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. and select Glass. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. Handrail only. and double-click Lounge Perspective. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. and click to split the floor. click (Split). This is the railing that you want to add to your model. 5 Expand Railing. The floor sketch displays. and on the Options Bar. click OK. double-click 02 Level. and Parapet. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 8 In the Project Browser.rvt. in the Project Browser. 2 In the left pane of the dialog.

17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. click (Align). move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. verify that Chain is not selected. click Modify. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. 148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. and click to place it. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. and on the Options Bar. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 18 On the Design Bar. and click to draw another line. and click the lock to lock the alignment.15 On the Design Bar. and click to draw another line. click Lines. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B. 25 Select grid line B. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched.

rvt project. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. 30 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . 33 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select Glass. and click the lock to lock the alignment. click Railing Properties. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. Lock the dimensions. and click OK. click Railing. 29 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Tools toolbar. click Dimension. 31 In the Revit dialog.26 Select grid line D. click (Align). Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and lock the alignment. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. click Finish Sketch. enter 100 mm. for Type. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. For Offset. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown.

View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 39 Click Finish Sketch. click Dimension.37 On the Design Bar. 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. click Camera.

■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . You can view the railing that you just added. Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

43 Close all project drawings. 152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. lofty ceilings. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. slight modifications to the building design have been made. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. NOTE For training purposes. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. balconies. and a roof garden. 153 . exterior fire stairs.

154 .

155 . and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. You learn how to create new views from existing views. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. how to create section and elevation views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. including plan. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. you learn how to create views from a building model.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. section. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. elevation.

expand Floor Plans. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views.rvt. click Training Files.Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

4 In the Project Browser. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 9 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 7 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. select Level 2. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. under Floor Plans. and click OK. under Floor Plans. and click OK. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. 8 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan.2 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 .

Next. and click 1: 1000. 13 In the Project Browser.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Under Floor Plans. click the current scale. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 12 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 14 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. enter Vicinity Plan. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. double-click Vicinity Plan. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 16 Right-click. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.rvt.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. select 1:100. 3 In the Type Selector. click Elevation. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry.rvt. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Scale. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. select Elevation: Building Elevation. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar.

click Modify. click Modify. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 . 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building.

for Scale. double-click South East.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. 162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter South East. under Views (all). select 1:100. and click OK. 10 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. 14 In the Type Selector. click Section. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. 15 On the Options Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and double-click Level 1. 11 In the Project Browser. ■ Move the cursor down. expand Floor Plans. under Elevations. select Section: Building Section. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 . 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building.Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building.

Click the midpoint of the section line. and click to place it. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair.19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. click Split Segment. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

24 Select gridline F. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. and double-click Section 1. using the blue circular drag grip. click Modify. 23 On the View Control Bar. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. expand Sections (Building Section).21 On the Design Bar. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 .

you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. To create each view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .25 On the Design Bar.

Creating Callout Views | 167 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. for Scale. select 1:50. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. select Floor Plan. click Callout. 3 In the Type Selector.Resulting callout view . and click to specify a point to complete the callout. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair.rvt. 4 On the Options Bar.

and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. and select the callout boundary. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. ■ Select the middle grip. click Modify.

and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. and click OK. select 1:50. 9 In the Rename View dialog. click Callout. for Scale. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. 13 In the Type Selector. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. under Sections (Building Sections). Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Callout Views | 169 . double-click Section 1. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. 14 On the Options Bar.7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Detail View: Detail.

■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 16 Modify the callout leader as shown.

and click OK. double-click Roof Overhang Detail.17 In the Project Browser. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. under Detail Views (Details). 18 In the Rename View dialog. expand Detail Views (Details). enter Roof Overhang Detail. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Callout Views | 171 .

172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Training Files. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises.rfa. under Floor Plans. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. select Custom-Section Head. open Metric\Families\Annotations. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Level 1. You change the appearance of the section mark head. and click Open.rvt. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. the elevation markers. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards.

5mm Square. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 17 Under Category. click Duplicate. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. and click OK twice. and click OK. 8 In the Name dialog. click Load into Project. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. select the section line. select Section Head . scroll to Section Marks. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Section Head – Custom. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. enter 12. 10 On the floor plan. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. . The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and select 3. and select 2. scroll to Section Line. and can be applied to the section line. clear any others. Section Tail . 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. 12 For Section Tag. click Edit/New. 19 Click OK. On the floor plan. 15 Under Category. select the current project.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. for Section Head. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . 22 In the Name dialog. click the Annotation Objects tab. Section Tail – Filled.Custom. and click OK.Filled. and click OK. and click OK.

for Callout Tag. and click OK. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. For Corner Radius. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. 36 In the drawing. and on the Options Bar. notice the square elevation markers that display. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. click Edit/New. click Edit/New. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. select 3. and click Open. Click OK. and on the Options Bar. . 30 On the Design Bar. For Dimensions ➤ Width. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius.rfa. click Load into Project. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. click Training Files. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. for Elevation Tag. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Custom-Callout Head. 39 Click OK twice. On the floor plan. enter 12. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags.5 mm. select 12. 40 Press ESC. select the callout. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. select Square. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. . under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. 27 Click OK twice. enter 6 mm. open Metric\Families\Annotations. select the current project.23 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. click Duplicate. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .5mm Square. 34 In the Name dialog. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. clear all others. For Line Weight.

and select 4. expand Callout Boundary. 49 Click OK. click the Annotation Objects tab. 46 Under Category. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. You learn to create view templates. select Dash. view regions. masking regions. 45 For Line Pattern. filters. and select 7. 43 Under Category. and visual overrides. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. scroll down to Callout Boundary. 47 Select Callout Leader Line.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views.

5 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). The crop region displays as red.Creating a View Template In this exercise. and apply it to multiple elevation views. under Elevations. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings.rvt. and double-click East. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Show Crop Region). 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. click Zoom to Fit. 6 On the View Toolbar. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Training Files. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. To accomplish this. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings.

11 Under Visibility. under Visibility. Callouts.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK. 13 On the View Control bar. levels. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. Creating a View Template | 177 . clear Entourage. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. grids. elevation markers. and section lines are now hidden in the view. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On.

178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Black and White Presentation Elevation. right-click North. and click OK.14 In the Project Browser. 20 Using the same method. click Apply. 15 In the New View Template dialog. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click OK. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. right-click East. under Elevations. 16 In the View Templates dialog. 17 In the Project Browser. and click Apply View Template. under Elevations. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. and click Create View Template From View.rvt. edit the crop region as before. double-click North.

rvt. under Extents. double-click Penthouse. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. for Level. under Floor Plans. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. right-click. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. select Level Below (Level 4). 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. click Edit. 2 In the Project Browser. Click OK twice. Under View Depth. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. for View Range. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. for Bottom. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. and click Properties. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. select Penthouse. select Level Below (Level 4). NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view.

8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Level 4. right-click. double-click Roof Plan. select Level 4. 6 In the Project Browser. click Edit. under Extents.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Bottom. Click OK twice. and click Properties. Under View Depth. under Floor Plans. select Roof Plan. for Level. for View Range.

Move you cursor diagonally. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. for View Range. 11 On the Options Bar. for Level. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. for Bottom. select Unlimited. under Extents. 13 On the Design Bar. select Unlimited. 16 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Plan Region. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . 10 On the Design Bar. In the left corner of the building. click Finish Sketch. Click OK twice. click Edit. click Lines. Under View Depth. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range.

Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise.17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. in this case. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. After you apply the filter. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Floor Plans. click the Filters tab. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. under Views (all). and double-click Level 1. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. the fire rating of the walls. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters.

click Remove. click Edit/New. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. and click OK. 9 Click OK. click Override under Patterns. under Projection/Surface. and click OK. select the red color. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. for Rated Walls. for Pattern. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Basic colors. 12 On the Filter tab. click OK. Select contains. under Categories. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and apply a color. for Color. under Filters. 17 Using the same method. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 16 Click OK. click Add.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Solid Fill. and click OK. enter Rated Walls. 5 In the Filters dialog. click <No Override>. Enter Hr. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. select Walls. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. 14 In the Color dialog. 11 Select Rated Walls. click (New). 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. and click OK. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . 7 In the Filters dialog. 10 On the Filter tab. select Fire Rating.

you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. To accomplish this. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 11 In the Type Selector. as shown. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 9 On the View Control Bar. 4 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. Masking Portions of a View | 185 .rvt. 5 On the View menu. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. click Show Crop Region. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 1 In the Project Browser. 7 On the View menu.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. right-click. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 8 Select the crop region. and click OK. under Floor Plans. click Masking Region. select Invisible lines.

186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .12 On the Options Bar. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click (Rectangle). 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Finish Sketch. 14 On the Design Bar.

select Walls. and click Override. under Pattern Overrides. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click <No Override> to apply a color. for Pattern. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1.Level 1. right-click. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. right-click. 7 Under Cut. click black.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. under Visibility. and click 1: 50.rvt. click the current scale. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. and click OK. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. click in the Patterns field. and click OK. for Color. select Solid fill. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 4 On the View Control Bar. 11 Click OK twice. right-click Unit 18 Plan . You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. and click Rename.

188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Visibility.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Under Visibility. and click OK. clear Floors. clear Grids. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. click Modify. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. and click Hide in View ➤ Category. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 .18 Right-click.

27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. select the sofa. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. under Lines. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. click a purple color. select Dash. 21 Under Projection/Surface. for Color. click Override. and click OK. click Projection Lines. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan.20 Right-click. By using the previous method to make the selection. 23 In the Color dialog. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. for Pattern. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 25 Click OK twice. right-click. click <No Override> to apply a color.

The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . select a bright green color. 32 Select one of the lamps. 29 In the Color dialog. right-click.28 For Color. click . 30 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. click By Category Override.

Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson.33 On the View Control Bar. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. click . how to add views to the sheets. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks.

click Training Files.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. and click View.rvt. select A0 metric. and click OK. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog.Creating Sheets. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. click Sheet. right-click. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet.

7 On the Design Bar. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 3 In the Project Browser. enter Site Plan. 5 When the title block highlights. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. Click OK.Unnamed. click Modify.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties). click Modify. and select the title block. on the Options Bar. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. expand Sheets (all). enter A101. For Sheet Number. For Sheet Name. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 .

enter 15 May. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 . enter For Approval. For Project Name. enter 2009-1. enter Freighthouse Flats. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. 14 Click OK. For Client Name. 2009. enter J. click Edit. MA 12345 12 Click OK.Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. For Project Status. The new project information displays in the titleblock. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. for Project Address. Smith. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. For Project Number.

17 In the Project Browser. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Rename. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 .Elevations A106 .Stairs In the following exercise. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. and click OK. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . for Name.Elevations A105 . 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. you add views to these sheets. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise.Layout Plan A104 .Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog.Sections A108 . select A0 metric. enter Floor Plan. and click OK. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. right-click.rvt. and click Save. select the new sheet name. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Elevations A107 .

Floor Plan. 2 In the Project Browser. click Modify. The red border around the view no longer displays. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Design Bar. and click to place the view. under Sheets (all).Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click to place it. Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click A102 .Elevations. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. select Level 1. under Sheets (all). double-click A104 . and drag it to the sheet.

12 On the Design Bar. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Sheets (all). drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. click Modify. Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser.Sections. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). and click to place it. 8 On the Design Bar. align it with the East elevation. click Modify. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). double-click A107 . and click to place it. and click to place it.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet.

Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . move the cursor over it. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. for View Scale.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. 16 Select title bar. zoom in to the grip. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. select 1:5. . and press TAB until it highlights. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog.

drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. click Modify. 18 Under Floor Plans. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it. under Sheets (all). double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. double-click A108 . and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Design Bar.Stairs. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save.

under Sheets (all). Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . 5 On the Design Bar.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. In order to do this. double-click A107 . click Modify. enter 16700 mm. and click Activate View. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height.Sections. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line.rvt. right-click. and then make changes and deactivate the view. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. you must first activate the view on the sheet. 2 Select the building section view. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. and press ENTER.

you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. under Elevations (Building Elevation). You modify the view to hide the view title.6 Right-click. double-click North. and click Deactivate View. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 7 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. After you create the sheet. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. you create a title sheet for your drawing set.rvt. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.

enter T. The camera view displays. and click Properties. select A0 metric. Click OK. and click OK. right-click. click Camera. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 .Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. enter Title Sheet. 7 Place the camera as shown. For Sheet Name. select the new sheet name. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1.

select Far Clip Active. For Target Elevation. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click to place it in the center of the sheet. Under Camera. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. Under Extents. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region.Title Sheet. for Eye Elevation. double-click T . 14 Under 3D Views. enter 100000 mm. enter 18000 mm. 13 In the Project Browser. 11 On the View Control Bar.8 On the Options Bar. Click OK. 12 On the View Control Bar. enter 1500 mm. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. under Sheets (all). drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. For Far Clip Offset. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .

. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. 19 Select the view on the sheet. 24 Click OK twice. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. 25 On the Design Bar.15 With the view selected. click Edit/New. enter Viewport/no title mark. click Modify. enter 635 mm. 22 In the Name dialog. click Size. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. select No. Click Apply. on the Options Bar. for Height. click Duplicate. and then click OK. under Graphics. select Scale (locked proportions). click Modify. for Show title. Under Model Crop Size.

206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and close the exercise file.26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. Because of the open style floor plan. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. click Training Files.Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. such as room and window schedules. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. expand Floor Plans. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. 207 . Tagging Objects In this lesson. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. such as doors and windows. You also learn to create different types of schedules. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command.

create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. and click Room and Area. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. move the cursor to the right. click Room Separation. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. right-click in the Design Bar.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. as shown: 5 Using the same method. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing).

create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.6 Using the same method. 7 On the Design Bar. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 9 In the Tags dialog. click Modify. click Load.

17 Zoom in on the tag number. 11 In the Tags dialog. type U18-1. click it. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. click Training Files.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . indicating that it can be edited.rfa. click Room. click OK. type 2400 mm. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. The room tag number displays in blue. 14 For Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. and press ENTER. and select the room tag. and the rectangle contains the room tag. click Modify. verify that Tag on placement is selected. and click to place the room and tag. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.

place rooms and tags. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . type Entry. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. and press ENTER. type Kitchen. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. 23 Using the same method. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. click Room. 19 On the Design Bar. Click to place the new room and tag.18 Click the room text label. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. Sequential letters are also supported. 22 Click the room text label. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Dining. click Modify. click Modify. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. and press ENTER.

double-click Unit 18 Plan . click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. and moving clockwise. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. and click OK. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Modify.Level 2. 29 On the Design Bar. clear Room Separation. on the Model Categories tab. under Floor Plans. The rooms are already placed. but they need to be tagged. expand Lines. 27 On the Design Bar. click Room Tag.

You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. click Tag ➤ By Category. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. you learn how to place door and window tags. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. in the Project Browser. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. clear Leader. 31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. and double-click Unit 18 Plan .30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. expand Floor Plans.Level 1.rvt.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

For 103. type Storage. 101-106. For 104. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. and press ENTER. for room 101. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. for Name. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. For 105. type Corridor. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . click New. select Storage. 10 Edit the number to be 101. and press ENTER. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. The room Number is U17-46. and press ENTER. next to Rows. type Building Entry. For 102.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. 11 Using the same method. select Corridor. add 5 more rooms.

select 9. click the bright green swatch. click the Color field. In the Line Graphics dialog. For Room Separation. and modify room names. and press ENTER. expand Lines. you add room separation lines. double-click Level 1. and click OK.■ For 106. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. Under Custom colors.rvt. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 4 Click OK twice. type Stair. place rooms from a program list. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Override. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 13 Save the file. In the Lines field. For Weight. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Visibility. under Floor Plans. under Projection/Surface. click the Lines field. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan.

draw the horizontal line. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . First. click Room Separation. 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. click Room. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 9 On the Design Bar.

11 On the Options Bar. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . select 101 Building Entry. 13 On the Options Bar. for Room. for Room. select 102 Storage. type 2400 mm. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right).Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. 14 For Offset.

Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. 16 Using the same method. place the following rooms. under Floor Plans. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. under Schedules/Quantities.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. click Modify. and zoom in to the Corridor. 19 In the Project Browser. as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . double-click Level 1. double-click Room Schedule. 20 While pressing CTRL. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). 17 On the Design Bar.

22 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add. and click OK. 30 On the Options Bar. clear Room Bounding. 24 Open the Room Schedule. under Available fields. 31 For Key Name. and Wall Finish. type Units. under Constraints.21 On the Options Bar. while pressing CTRL. click Modify. and for all 3 finishes. select Rooms. for Rows. and click OK. under Category. select Base Finish. 27 Select Schedule keys. click 23 On the Design Bar. click New. Floor Finish. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . The Room Style Schedule displays without data. type As Selected. (Element Properties). 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

select Units. click (Element Properties). select Units. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 Under U17-8. select Rooms. for Room Style. click (Filter Selection). and click OK. under Identity Data. and click Add. 43 In the Filter dialog. under Other. 44 On the Options Bar. click Check None. under Floor Plans. for Fields. 33 In the Project Browser. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. select Room Style. double-click Level 1. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule.32 Using the same method. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. 36 Click OK twice. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . and click Properties. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. for Available fields. 37 Open the Room Schedule. right-click Room Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. 42 On the Options Bar. click Edit. and click OK. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Room Style.

46 Open the Room Schedule. type Room Type. and 106. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select Service. select Public. and click Properties. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. and apply it to the Level 1 view. right-click Level 1. under Views (all). For rooms 102 and 105. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 9 In the Project Browser. 104. click the Color Scheme field. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. type Room Type. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 48 Save the file. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. under Graphics. 103. under Floor Plans. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click OK. at the warning prompt. click OK. click 5 For Title. 7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. and double-click Level 1.rvt. (Duplicate). 4 In the New color scheme dialog. and click OK. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. expand Floor Plans. select Room Style. for Color. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise.

19 On the Options Bar. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click the value in the Color column. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . select Room Type. click Modify. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. select the color legend. under Visibility. under Schemes. click Edit Color Scheme. and clear Room Separation. clear Visible. 17 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). and click OK. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 14 Click OK twice. expand Lines. a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. click Color Scheme Legend.

for Swatch Width. under Custom color. click Modify. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. 24 Click OK. type 25 mm. and click OK. click Edit/New. 30 On the Design Bar. select blue.22 In the Color dialog. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. (Element Properties). 28 Under Title Text. under Graphics. type 5 mm. 23 Using the same method. 29 Click OK twice. respectively. for Size.

under Sections. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. right-click Building Section. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . under Sections. select Rooms. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. for Color Scheme. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and select Properties. Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. select Room Type. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. click Edit. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. double-click Building Section. under Graphics. and click OK. click Color Scheme Legend. 35 Click OK twice. under Visibility.

45 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. select Units. click Check None. and click OK. 42 In the Filter dialog. for Room Style. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Click . 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 On the Options Bar. select all the rooms in the stairwell.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. under Identity Data. and click OK. select Rooms. for Room Style. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. (Filter Selection). select Public. under Identity Data. click . and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104).

click New. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. and click . type Suites. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. excluding the stairwell spaces. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . for Rows. 51 On the Options Bar. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. 49 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. under Identity Data. 54 While pressing CTRL. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. for Room Style.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. select Service. double-click Room Style Schedule. under Key Name for the new row.

A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. select the room on the left side of the top floor.55 Click . but not beyond it. The color fill extends to the roof. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. 59 Under Room Area Computation. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. select Suites. under Identity Data. select Areas and Volumes. for Room Style. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . The color fill will extend to the roof. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog. and click OK. under Volume Computations. and click OK. 56 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that At wall finish is selected.

72 On the Design Bar. 66 Click OK. type 0. and the living room. under Constraints. for Upper Limit. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. select Loft. under Constraints. 71 Click OK. select Level 2. and click 65 For Limit Offset. for Upper Limit. select the stairwell room. 68 Click . click Modify. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). 70 For Limit Offset.0. type -254 mm. 67 On the first level. the dining room. .Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. 69 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 .

You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates.73 Save the file. under 3D Views. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. double-click {3D}.

under Category. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. click Modify.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. select Roofs. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields.EPDM. 3 While pressing CTRL. 5 On the Design Bar. under Available fields. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. 4 In the Type Selector.Insulation on Plywood Deck . 9 Using the same method. For Then by. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. Select Grand totals. and click Add. Clear Itemize every instance. click Family and Type. select Family and Type. select Material: Description. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. and click OK. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff.

24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. and click Properties.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . for Material: Cost. under Other. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. click Edit.40 50. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. click the Formatting tab. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). right-click Roof Material Takeoff. select Material: Cost. click Estimated Cost. 21 Click OK. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. select Currency. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. and click Add. select Calculate totals. Under Field formatting. 12 Click OK. 19 For Type. 20 For Formula. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. under Available fields. and click OK twice. for Name. for Fields. 23 For Field formatting. 17 Click Calculated Value. and under Fields. select Material: Area. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. select Calculate totals. type Estimated Cost.

In this lesson. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. ensuring consistency across families and projects. can be used for any number-based parameter. tag the line. 29 Select Use digit grouping. for Currency. click the Format value. You draw a travel path line. These shared parameters can be added to any family. adding the shared parameters to a family. not just for currency. regardless of category. and schedule the total distance of each path. creating a generic tag to tag the family.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . 31 Save the file. for Rounding. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. either within family components or within the project template. Digit grouping. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. which inserts commas after every three digits. and are defined and stored in an external file. 30 Click OK twice. you create an exiting plan for the building. and reporting the shared parameters. 28 For Unit symbol. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. 27 In the Format dialog. 26 In the Project Units dialog. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. you create a shared parameter file. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. The cost fields are formatted correctly. select $.

12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. type OfficeStandardsParameters. and click Save. type Exiting. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. under Floor Plans.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.txt. for Name. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. click Training Files. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. under Groups. select Length. for Name. 7 Under Parameters. for Type of Parameter. click New. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters.rvt. click Training Files. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. for File name.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. type Travel Distance. type Path ID. 1 In the Project Browser. click New. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 9 Under Parameters. click New. 11 Click OK twice. for Name. click Create. and click OK.

for Group parameter under. Click Training Files. otherwise the family loads into the current project. 15 If necessary. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. 13 Click Apply. and click OK. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 12 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. under Parameters. under Parameter Data. 8 Select Instance. If you have multiple projects open. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 14 On the Design Bar. select Shared parameter. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. group it under Dimensions. 10 Using the same method. 11 Click OK. select Constraints. click Family Types.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise.rvt. under Dimensions. and click OK. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected.rfa. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. following the equals symbol (=). in the Load into Projects dialog. click Add. click Add. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and select Instance. 9 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. under Parameters. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click Select. type Length. for Travel Distance Formula. under Parameter Type. 3 On the Design Bar. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. click Load into Projects.

rft. 21 In the Edit Label dialog. under Category Parameters. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. under Parameters.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 19 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Label. click (Add Parameter). 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. click Label. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. click Training Files. select Travel Distance. click Select. and click OK. 24 Click OK twice. select Travel Distance. click parameter(s) to label).

34 On the Load into Projects dialog. click Load into Projects.28 On the Design Bar. and move it down. select Path ID. for File Name. type M_Travel Distance Tag. and press DELETE. and click Save. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. 33 On the Design Bar. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. and click OK. 35 Save the file. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 .rfa. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. 29 In the drawing window.rvt is selected. 32 In the Save As dialog. click Modify.

you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. click Component. under Floor Plans. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Placing.Level 1. double-click Exiting Plan . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. and click in the center of the corridor. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. above the exterior door as shown. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 6 Move the cursor to the right.Tagging. After the lines are tagged. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. select Chain. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

10 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. through the door. clear Leader. type 1-1. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 17 On the Options Bar.Tagging.7 Move the cursor down.Level 2. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. 12 On the Design Bar. move the cursor near the right corner. 8 On the Design Bar. select the 2 dashed travel lines. for Path ID. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . click Tag ➤ By Category. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Component. and click (Element Properties). verify that Chain is selected. and click outside of the building. Placing. 13 While pressing CTRL. double click Exiting Plan . under Constraints. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. click Modify. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser.

23 Move the cursor down. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path.19 Move the cursor up through the door. and click above the door to the stair. click Component. 256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. 20 On the Design Bar. and click. and click in the stair.

25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog.24 On the Design Bar. specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. . for Path ID. 27 On the Design Bar. 30 Using the same method.Tagging. type 2-1. 33 For Name. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. click Modify. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. and click OK. click Modify. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. under Category. type Level 1 Exit Distance. under Constraints. and click OK. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . 28 While pressing CTRL. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. Placing.

Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 49 Click OK twice. type 1-. and click Rename. in the first field. 40 Click the Formatting tab. while pressing CTRL. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 For Sort by. click Edit.rvt. for Filter. under Other. select Path ID and Travel Distance. and in the third field. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. click Training Files. 46 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 44 In the Project Browser. and click OK. in the third field. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. and click Add. for Filter by. select Path ID. and under Field formatting. under Schedules/Quantities. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Properties. 42 Click OK. select Travel Distance. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. 43 In the Project Browser.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. type Level 2 Exit Distance. 36 For Filter by. select Calculate totals. in the second field. select Path ID. type 2-. 50 Save the file. 35 Click the Filter tab. 45 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 41 Under Fields. select contains. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. under Available fields.

and click . 9 Click OK twice. click the Value field.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. 4 Under Available fields. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.152 mm. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description.Interiors ➤ C10 . 2 In the New Schedule dialog. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall.Partitions . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.Fixed Partitions. for Assembly Code. and select C1010145 . expand C . 10 In the schedule. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 .Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Partitions ➤ C1010100 . right-click the Design Bar. select Walls. and click Properties. click the Fields tab. and click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. select the following fields. and click View.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . under Categories. right-click Generic . under Identity Data. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.

8 In the New Database dialog.mdb). and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 11 Click OK 3 times. for Database Name. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog.11 Close the exercise file. click OK. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. and click OK to create the database. select a location for the database file. 9 Under Directories. 6 Click Finish. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. type Revit_Project. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. the database display may be different than that shown. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. and click Next. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Create. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. click the File Data Source tab.rvt. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. under Database. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. click Training Files.mdb. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. 1 On the File menu. 3 Click New. and click Next.

instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. in addition to the Id column. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. For example. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. Additionally. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. 13 Close the exercise file. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types.

262 .

or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial. 263 .

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. In order to detail from the building model. 297 . and metal studs. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. plywood. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. These components display at the required scale. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. you trace over the building model geometry. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. add detail components. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. like a standard door header condition. In the callout view.

6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. region objects.rvt. Exact location is not important. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. click Training Files. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. and click Open.rfa.Detailing the View In this exercise. After you add components. you detail the view of the roof edge. The roof overhang detail displays. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . They are also view specific. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. double-click the detail callout head. and click OK. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. 7 In the drawing area. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. which means that all detail components. click Detail Component. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 5 In the alert dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. as well as detail lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and insulation objects. select As underlay. click Training Files. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. You load detail components. 3 In the Element Properties dialog.

select Corrugated Metal. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 For Spacing. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. click Repeating Detail. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. for Pattern ➤ Detail.8 Delete the component. and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail.5mm. Detailing the View | 299 . 16 Click OK twice. enter 406. 10 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. click (Element Properties). click Modify. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. 17 In the drawing area. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the Name dialog. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents.

23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click Open.rfa. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. click (Move). Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. click Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. 22 On the Options Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. click Load.20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. click Training Files. 24 In the Type Selector. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. ■ ■ Click Modify. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

29 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Type Selector.rvt. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Detailing the View | 301 . navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. 30 In the Type Selector. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog.Because you still have several components to load. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. press SPACEBAR 3 times. click Training Files. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. click Detail Component. you load them as a group from a single file. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. and place it in the detail view as shown. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. click OK. 31 To properly orient the component. and click Open.

NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 37 Click Modify. 38 Select the horizontal segment. select Chain. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. and click Modify. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 35 On the Options Bar. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. click the Flip instance arrows.

41 Place 2 segments of insulation. 42 Click Modify. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. as shown. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. select to near side. enter 140mm. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. Detailing the View | 303 . click Insulation. click Detail Component. click (Move). 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width.Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. For Offset. and on the Edit toolbar. ■ Click Modify. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point.

52 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. as shown. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. click Detail Lines. 51 Click Modify. Like detail components. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. you add lines to your detail. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. and lock the component. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Thin Lines. meaning they display only in this view. 2 In the Type Selector.45 In the Type Selector. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. they are view specific. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. 47 In the Type Selector.

Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. click Detail Lines. select Medium Lines. For Offset.4 Click Modify. enter 10mm. as shown. as shown. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. 10 On the Design Bar. select Thin Lines. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. 11 In the Type Selector. and press ENTER. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 10mm. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. For Offset. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 7 In the Type Selector.

as shown. select Chain. and clear Chain. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. 16 On the Options Bar. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and draw the detail lines as shown.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. click (Draw).

Click (Pick Lines). Adding Detail Lines | 307 . click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. right-click. 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard.18 In the Type Selector. select Do not display. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. 24 On the View Control Bar. 22 In the Project Browser. When you turn the display model off. select the Penthouse level line. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. enter 10mm. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. and click OK. click Detail Lines. draw the detail lines as shown. and click Properties. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. select Vapor Barrier. and press ENTER. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. select Thin Lines. For Offset. 26 In the Type Selector. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail).

Adding Text Notes on page 308. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. press SPACEBAR as necessary. click Detail Component. select M_Break Line. 32 Click Modify. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. you add text notes to complete the detail. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail.29 On the Design Bar. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. 30 In the Type Selector. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it.

click Text. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow.rvt. 2 On the Options Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click to place the dimension. click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Enter the text. click Dimension. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. 6 Click Modify. Click again to specify the location of the text box. Adding Text Notes | 309 .

2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. select a text note. click Select All Instances. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Detail Components on page 310. and click OK. click Roof Overhang Detail. enter Typ. and save the exercise file. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. right-click. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. enter Roof Overhang Detail . Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. 3 In the Rename View dialog. under Text Fields.. on the Options Bar.Keynotes. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. (Filter Selection).7 Select the dimension line. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. right-click. click 6 In the Filter dialog.rvt. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click Rename. 8 In the Dimension Text dialog. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. and click the dimension text. and click OK. and press DELETE. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. for Suffix. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 10 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click.

9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. in the Type Selector. 16 Click Modify. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. click Training Files. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 15 Use a window to select all linework.7 Click Modify. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 14 Click Modify. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. select Medium Lines. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. select all the coping linework.rft. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. while pressing CTRL. and click Open. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. Creating Detail Components | 311 . and selecting the chain. pressing TAB.

and click Open. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. navigate to your preferred location. and click OK. and the component can be placed in the detail. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. click Training Files. 24 On the Options Bar. 31 Using the same method used previously. click Detail Component. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. click Load into Projects. The original linework remains selected. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. 23 Using a window. 28 On the Options Bar. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 Click Modify. 30 In the drawing area. click . Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.Keynotes view is not the open view. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. clear Detail Items. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. click Load. Adding Keynotes on page 312. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. While pressing SHIFT. double-click it in the Project Browser. 27 On the Design Bar. select the coping. 26 Press DELETE. 25 In the Filter dialog. 21 To place the component. click Detail Component. enter Roof Edge. for File name. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected.rfa. and click Save.18 In the Save As dialog. you place keynotes on objects. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . delete the underlying linework.

select the rigid insulation as the object to tag.D11. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. click Edit/New. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the metal fascia with drip edge. use keynote 06160. click Keynote ➤ Element.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Roof Edge4.rvt. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. and click Open. use keynote 07645. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. (Element Properties). 6 Click Modify. For the metal coping. 63mm Rigid Insulation. 2 In the alert dialog.B5. Click to place the leader arm. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. 19mm Plywood. Adding Keynotes | 313 .rfa. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and click OK. click Training Files. In the Keynotes dialog.C1. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area.

Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. You do this in order to keynote the component. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.F1. For the 50 x 200. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. 18 Save the file. 12 On the Design Bar.D11. For the 50 x 150.20 Ga. use keynote 06160. click Keynote ➤ Element. use keynote 06110. use keynote 09250. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard.I1.D1. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. 17 Keynote the component. using keynote 07460. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. use keynote 06110. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them.G1. click in the Value column. 22mm Corrugated Steel . the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. FasciaProfile_1. and click . select Corrugated Metal. navigate to 07645. For the 50 x 300. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 15 In the Type Selector.F1. click Detail Component. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise.A8. 11 Click OK 3 times.9 In the Type Properties dialog. use keynote 06110.

enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. select Medium Line Detail Component. 11 Press DELETE. 16 Select the component. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. 24 While pressing CTRL. select Medium Lines. 15 Click Modify. click Training Files. click Edit/New. 23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. select the left end point of the reference line. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . 19 In the Name dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Load into Projects. click Load. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. navigate to your preferred location. click Detail Component. click Duplicate. and select the right end point. and m_Light Line Detail Component. 5 In the drawing area. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 Click OK 3 times. and click (Element Properties).rvt.rft. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 13 In the Type Selector. 8 In the Save As dialog. click Training Files. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. and click Open. and click Open. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. and click Save. for File name. click Detail Component. click Lines. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. 4 In the Type Selector. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 Lock the line. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. and click Modify. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 22 On the Options Bar.

48 Using the same method used previously.25 Next. 40 Click Modify. 30 Click Modify. click (Move). 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 46 Click Modify. 28 In the Type Selector. 37 Click OK 3 times. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. click Detail Component. 47 Select the component. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. and click . 31 Select the component. and click . 35 In the Type Properties dialog. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and click . invisible. 27 On the Design Bar. 42 Using the same method used previously. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. select m_Light Line Detail Component.G1. and hidden) used in the view. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. and click . Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. against the 19mm plywood.A1. click Duplicate. click Detail Component. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. click Detail Component. name the component Air Barrier. 44 On the Design Bar. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and assign it keynote 07260. click in the Value column. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and click the lower end at the break line. on the Edit toolbar. 34 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. 38 On the Design Bar. 49 With the component selected. 41 Select the component just added. and click OK. and assign it keynote 06110. 29 In the drawing area. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light.A5. enter EPDM Membrane.

and click . 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 55 Click Modify. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. leaving the detail component lines. click Detail Component. select Chain. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 .Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 52 In the Type Selector. 53 On the Options Bar.

68 In the drawing area. 60 On the Design Bar. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents.58 Using the method used previously. name the component Vapor Barrier. and assign it keynote 07260. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.rfa. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 61 In the drawing area.A4. select the component. in the Type Selector. select Invisible Lines. 67 In the Type Selector.rfa. 63 In the drawing area. Air Barrier. click Keynote ➤ Element. 50 x 200 Framing. click Detail Component. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. and Vapor Barrier. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. click Load into Projects. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component.

You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing.txt. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. click Browse. and press ENTER. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . 71 In the drawing area. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. Enter 07463. name the component Batt Insul. click File menu ➤ Save. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319.. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. and press TAB.A4. and assign it keynote 07210. 70 Using the method used previously. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. and click . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 3 In the text editor. Enter 07460. and press TAB.rvt. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file.A9. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. 72 Save the file. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. and close the text editor. The database file opens in a text editor. add a keynote for the component. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460.A1. under Keynote Table.69 Select the component.

12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. you learn how to create a drafted detail. Each keynote displays as a simple number. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. After you create a drafting view.A1.txt. These details do not update with changes to the building model. under Path Type. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. 11 Click Modify. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. select all the keynotes. and click to place the note. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. click to place the leader. and click OK. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 14 Save the file. 9 In the drawing area. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. navigate to 07463. In the Type Selector. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select Absolute. and click Open. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. click Keynote ➤ Element. 13 Click Modify. and click OK.

Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 .dwg. and click OK. select 1 : 5. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail.Center to Center is selected. and click OK. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. right-click Drafting 1. for Scale. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 7 In the Rename View dialog. enter EPDM Metal Coping. and click Rename. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. Creating a Reference Callout on page 321.rvt.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. click Training Files. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 6 In the Project Browser. select Black and White. verify that Auto . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. The detail that you import is in DWG format. For Colors. Click Open. The detail is imported as an import symbol. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. For Positioning.

3 On the Options Bar. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing .Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 Click Modify. delete the existing value. 10 In the Rename dialog. and use the callout grips to move the callout head.No Reference. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. click Rename. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. click Edit/New. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Properties. 12 Click OK twice. click Callout. for New. 6 Select the callout. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. select Reference other view. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Detail .

Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. and double-click the callout. double-click A105 . 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . click Modify. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail./Det./Sect. The callout is updated with the sheet information. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail.No Reference). so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. 18 Save the file. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise.Elev. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 . Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet.

12 In the Type Properties dialog. 3 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click Region Properties. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. enter Gyp. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 14 Click OK 3 times. click Duplicate. Board. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Filled Region. for Name. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. for Name. enter Header @ Sliding Door. click Detail Component. click Edit/New. . 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 11 In the Name dialog.rvt. and click OK. 5 In the Type Selector. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. select Gypsum-Plaster. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

click 22 On the Options Bar. 18 While pressing CTRL. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click . Draw a rectangle as shown. (Mirror). Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. select Wide Lines.5mm.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. select the left and bottom edges of the region. 19 In the Type Selector. and on the Edit toolbar. and enter 20. click Finish Sketch. click (Draw). 17 Click Modify. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . 20 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the left edge of the region. select the width dimension.

24 Select the mirrored region. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 25 Click Modify. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. click Region Properties. for Name. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. 30 In the Name dialog. Move the cursor up. and click OK.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. enter Wood . . 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Finish. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 28 In the Element Properties dialog.Finish. and click above the top of the region as the end point. 33 Click OK 3 times. select Wood . click Filled Region. click Duplicate.

35 Select all the linework for the wood region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . click (Align). 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. select Medium Lines.5mm. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. select Medium Lines. click (Rectangle). verify that the thickness is 19mm. click . Draw a rectangle as shown. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. and select the right edge of the wood region. 37 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. 38 On the Design Bar.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Sketch. 39 In the Type Selector. sketch the new region as shown. in the Type Selector.

(Align). 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. click Ref Plane. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Finish Sketch. click Filled Region. enter 10mm. 46 On the Tools toolbar. and press ENTER. click 48 Click Modify. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. For Offset. 47 Click the reference plane. and press ENTER.42 On the Design Bar. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. For Offset. enter 6mm. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it.

54 On the Tools toolbar. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. and click to select the point. and press ENTER. enter 0. Move the cursor right 25mm. click Finish Sketch. click (Trim/Extend).52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). and click to select the point. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . and click to select the point. For Offset. Move the cursor left 25mm. 56 On the Design Bar. Select Chain. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. Move the cursor down 305mm. and select the bottom horizontal line.

select Medium Lines. click Detail Component. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. 68 Click Modify. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. and press ENTER. 58 In the Type Selector. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 69 Select the bolt.2mm.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar.rfa. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and press ENTER. enter 3mm. and click Open. click Detail Lines. enter 76. For Offset. click Training Files. select the height dimension. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 61 Click Modify. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. click Load. 60 Select the left. 62 Select the left detail line. top. 65 On the Options Bar. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and right edges of the door panel region. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines).

72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click Open. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. 76 In the Type Selector. select Wide Lines. click Detail Lines.70 On the Design Bar. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 74 Select the expansion bolt. click Detail Component. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. 71 On the Options Bar. click Load. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . use the images as a guide.rfa. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. click Training Files.

84 On the Design Bar. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 79 In the Type Selector. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 82 Select the rectangle. select Thin Lines. click Detail Lines. 87 Click Modify. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. click Detail Lines. 85 On the Options Bar. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing .78 On the Design Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. click . (Mirror). click . 80 On the Options Bar.

as shown.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. click Detail Lines. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. 92 Select the line. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. click (Mirror). 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. and on the Edit toolbar. select Medium Lines. 90 In the Type Selector. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . 89 On the Design Bar.

select the length dimension. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 102 In the Type Selector. and click to place the arc as shown. 99 Click Modify. 101 On the Design Bar. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. enter 3mm. click . 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 103 Add two break lines as shown. 95 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and press ENTER. select M_Break Line. click Detail Lines. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements.94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 97 On the Options Bar.

5mm Arial. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. click Dimension. 108 In the Type Selector. 107 On the Design Bar. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. and click Modify.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . 105 In the drawing area. 110 Select the dimension line. using the Drag Text grip. and click Modify. click Dimension. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. drag the text for the smaller dimension. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. 106 Click to place the dimension.

119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. under Dimension Value. and click the dimension text. 114 Click OK. enter See Schedule. select Replace With Text. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. and enter Varies. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog. for Below.2. 336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown. under Dimension Value. 113 Under Text Fields. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. select Replace With Text. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. 118 Select Modify to end the command.5mmArial. and then click the dimension text.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. click Dimension. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog.

Enter 225 mm @ Type C. and click to place the text. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. and click Modify. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. 126 In the drawing area. select the gypsum board region on the left.121 Click OK. 123 Click OK. click Text. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. Board. 128 Select the note. 127 Enter Gyp. 125 In the Options Bar. click to create an arced leader. and on the Options Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 . 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown.

click Modify to end the command. 338 | Chapter 7 Detailing .131 On the Design Bar. 132 Save the file.

Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. 339 . and double-click East. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation.rvt. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).

2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag.rfa. click Symbol. 7 On the Design Bar. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. click Training Files. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . type 1.Hexagon. click Modify. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. for Number of Leaders. 8 Select the keynote.

click (Copy). and click OK. 13 Select the tag. click (Element Properties). for Text. type Seal existing doors and insulate. 12 On the Edit toolbar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Note Block | 341 . and click above the tag to place the copy. on the Options Bar. under Identity Data.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected.

15 For Text. type Repair existing door surround. click Copy. on the Edit toolbar. 16 For Tag. (Mirror). and click. click (Element Properties). on the Options Bar. type B. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 17 Click OK. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. and on the Options Bar. make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building.14 With the copy selected. 19 With the tag selected. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 18 Using the same method. clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building.

Clean existing concrete loading dock. Remove all existing windows. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. Clean exterior brick wall. using the table as a reference. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 .21 On the Design Bar. Repair as required. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. click Modify. Tuckpoint as required. Repair existing door surround. 22 Optionally. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. and moving counter-clockwise. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements.

and click Add. Create. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. select Exterior Construction Notes. 28 In the Project Browser. and click Add. expand Sheets (all). type 6 mm. and click OK. for Sort by. Select Text. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Header text. for the value. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. select Tag. under Available fields. On the Formatting tab. 24 In the New Note Block dialog.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. 27 In the column header (text). for Note block name. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. format. 29 In the Project Browser. 26 Click OK. and drag it to the sheet. and double-click A103 . expand Schedules/Quantities. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. for Heading. type Description. select Tag. and for Alignment. select Center. type Exterior Construction Notes. verify that Arial is selected. Clean cut and repair wall as required.Elevations. and select Bold. type Mark. On the Appearance tab.

you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.31 On the Design Bar. double-click T . 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. click Modify.rvt. Using Drawing Lists | 345 . Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. under Sheets (all). 32 Zoom in to see the note block.rvt. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.Title Sheet.

8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. and in the third field. ■ 4 Click OK. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . select Sheet Index. select Sheet Number. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. expand Schedules/Quantities. in the second field. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. select Sheet Number. under Sheets (all). 7 In the Project Browser. On the Filter tab. for Filter by.Title Sheet. select Sheet Number. in the first field.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. select does not equal. 5 In the list title field. double-click T . and expand the right column to accommodate the text. The drawing list displays. type T. 6 In the Project Browser. for Sort by. and click Add. and drag it to the sheet. under Available fields. Select Sheet Name. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and click Add.

Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. door frame schedule. you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. and so on). windows. Training File Using Legends | 347 . click Modify. and door frames. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. On construction documents. For the text. 11 Save the file. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls.9 On the Design Bar. On construction documents. Finally. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. doors. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference.

2 In the New Legend View dialog.rvt. type 3mm. and click OK twice. and click OK. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Name. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. click Symbol. 6 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . 10 For Text Size.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . type Legend Text.Open Level Head . and click OK. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. click . Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. 9 For Text Font. for Name. type Typical Symbol Legend. click Duplicate. click Text. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. you create a text type with the necessary size. select Arial. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. click Edit/New. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Type Properties dialog.

14 Working from the top down. and for Leader. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 .Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. 16 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. expand Legends. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. verify that is selected. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. and double-click A101 . click Typical Symbol Legend.Site Plan/Floor Plan.

350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .17 In the Type Selector. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. 22 On the Design Bar. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet. under Sheets. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 21 In the Type Selector. click Modify. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. select Viewport : No Titlemark.Unit 18. double-click A102 . and click to place it. 23 Save the file.

and click OK. select Section. For Host length. type 4th Floor Wall Types. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component.rvt. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. and press ENTER. 5 On the View Control Bar. 6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. For View. select 1 : 50.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. select Medium for Detail Level. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. 3 For Scale. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Name. type 900 mm. click Legend Component.

14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for Leader. click Text. click Modify. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider.9 On the Design Bar. click to add text without a leader. 13 On the Options Bar. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. 12 In the Type Selector. for Family. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. 10 Select the second wall. and on the Options Bar.

right-click Sheets (all). 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. and click New Sheet. 19 Type the following text. click to add text with a single-segment leader. The text note with leader is added to the legend. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. and drag it to the new sheet. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select Level 4. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 23 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . pressing ENTER between component descriptions.

under Legends. drag it onto the sheet. 29 In the Project Browser. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. select 4th Floor Wall Types. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types.25 In the Project Browser. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. The open drawings are both visible. click Modify to end the command. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. double-click Level 4. 26 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.

34 Select the patio divider wall. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. select Detail Level: Medium. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. select the Wall Type 2 component. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. 33 In the floor plan view. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . 35 On the View Control Bar. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. click (Match Type).

356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. These changes can be due to owner requests. under Floor Plans. you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. Using the table. unanticipated changes in construction conditions.36 Optionally. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. click 37 Save the file. double-click Level 4. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. or changes in building material availability. contractor inquiries. You can create a sequence of revisions. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project.

5 For Description. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . If you select Per Sheet. verify that Per Project is selected. for Numbering. In most instances. the revision is locked and issued to the field. type a date. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. if the active revision is number 1. If Visible is not selected. When Issued is selected. For example. 7 Under Show. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. yet as concise as possible. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. When you use this option. In general.

You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. click (Move). Revision clouds have read-only properties. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 5 Select the divider. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise.8 Click OK. including revision number and revision date. 9 Save the file. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. move the cursor up. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you make changes to the project floor plan. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. click Modify. 3 Select the divider.rvt. 4 On the Edit toolbar. double-click Level 4. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 6 On the Design Bar.

8 In the drawing area. click near the partition you moved. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. and click OK. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. click Finish Sketch. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. select Snaps Off. In the Snaps dialog. 11 On the Design Bar. click Revision Cloud. NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

for Line Weight. select 6. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 16 Click OK. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click the Annotation Objects tab. you load a revision tag into the project. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 17 Save the file. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing.

the tag is displayed inside the cloud. you create additional revisions in the revision table. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 .rvt. click Tags. 12 Save the file. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. the cloud is tagged as number 1. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. Because you chose to number by project. 8 In the Tags dialog. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. you need to add one.rfa. click Tag ➤ By Category. 10 In the drawing area.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Working with Revisions In this exercise. scroll down to Revision Clouds. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. click Training Files. 6 Click Load. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. 4 On the Options Bar. select Leader. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. under Floor Plans. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 4. You then issue a revision. 11 Click to place the tag. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. and because the revision is the first in the project. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. 5 In the Tags dialog.

you can no longer modify it. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. You do this by issuing the revision. type Modify Paving Area. and enter a date for the revision. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and click OK. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. click Add.Unnamed. you prevent further changes to the revision. NOTE After you issue a revision. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.rvt. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. double-click A107 . You can continue to add revisions.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 Click OK. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. under Sheets. 8 Add another revision row. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. select Issued. with the description Relocate Door. and enter a date. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. 7 For Description. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area.

click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. select the revision cloud.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. double-click Level 4. 19 To add tags. in the drawing area. 11 On the Drafting tab. 12 In the drawing area.Modify Paving Area. select Seq. 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. Working with Revisions | 363 . under Sheets (all). select Revision Cloud.Unnamed. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. 13 Click Finish Sketch.Relocate Door to the revision cloud. 20 On the Project Browser. for Revision. apply Seq. under Floor Plans. double-click A107 . Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. click to add a revision clouds. 3 . 10 In the Project Browser. 2 . Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area. 17 Using the same method learned previously. select Tag ➤ By Category. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. 15 On the Options Bar.

26 In the drawing area. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. you edit the titleblock family. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. clear Issued. delete the first 3 characters. You do this so that the revision can be changed. for Numbering.Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. Click Options. height. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. For each revision. and rotation) to the revision schedule. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. 25 Click OK twice. select the titleblock. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. for Sequence. select Alphabetic. beginning with "D".

38 In the Reload Family dialog. for Appearance. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. 34 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. 33 Select the schedule header. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice. 28 In the alert dialog. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. select Bottom-up. and drag it above the schedule area. click Modify. right-click Revision Schedule. click Edit. Working with Revisions | 365 . under Other. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. Select Outline. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. Select Grid lines. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. for Build Schedule. click Edit Family.27 On the Options Bar. and press DELETE. and click Properties. Clear Blank row before data. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Yes. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. click Load into Projects. click Yes. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics.

select User defined. select 90° Counterclockwise. 45 On the Appearance tab. select the revision schedule.. With a user-defined height. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. and click Properties. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. for Height. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. for Heading. enter Rev. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. open the titleblock family for editing. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. for Formatting. the schedule is restricted to a specific size. for Rotation on Sheet. 40 Select the revision schedule header. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. click Edit.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. right-click Revision Schedule. 46 Click OK twice. under Other. When the height property is variable. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area.

Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. 51 Save the file. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet. Importing from Other Applications | 367 . you learn to import information (such as images.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. click Load into Projects. text. click Yes.

for Leader.Importing Image Files In this exercise. under Sheets. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet.rvt. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. double-click T . double-click T . click Training Files. 5 On the Design Bar.Title Sheet. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 3 On the Options Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets.Title Sheet.rvt. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click to add text without a leader. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Modify. 1 In the Project Browser. click Text. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and place it on a sheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.JPG.

click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. with the new text box still selected. 6 Select the text.doc text file in another window. click Modify. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . 11 Save the file. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. 9 On the Design Bar. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window.

click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . for File name.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click File menu ➤ Print. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. 12 Save the file.Unit 18. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog.rvt. for Name. 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. This step has been completed for you. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. and saved as Fixture Schedule. 10 On the Design Bar.xls. select the document writer. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. and click Save. double-click A102 . click Training Files.mdi. This exercise demonstrates a common method. click Desktop. This process may vary from system to system. click Modify. 4 Under Printer. 3 In Microsoft Excel.JPG. type Fixture Schedule. 5 Click OK.JPG. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. under Sheets.

you break up the plan into sections. or footprint. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. as well as a large lab building. 371 . called dependent views.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. The large floor plan. To effectively document this project. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan.

372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. click Training Files.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . under Floor Plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click Dependent on Level 2. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. 5 Click in the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit.Aviary. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building.Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Rename View dialog. select the crop region. and click Rename. under Level 2. 2 In the Project Browser. 6 In the drawing area. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. double-click Level 2. and the model crop is the interior crop region. right-click Level 2. for Name. 3 In the Project Browser. The dependent view opens. enter Level 2 . and click OK.

confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 .8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. 9 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region).

and on the Zoom flyout. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .Labs. for Name. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). right-click Level 2. and on the Zoom flyout. 12 In the Project Browser.10 Click in the drawing area. 11 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Rename View dialog. enter Level 2 . and click Rename. 15 Select the crop region. 17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. click Zoom To Fit. 14 Click in the drawing area. and click OK. click Zoom To Fit.

click Zoom To Fit.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 18 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 2.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . under Floor Plans. click Modify. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. and on the Zoom flyout. 20 Click in the drawing area. click (Hide Crop Region). (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. click Matchline. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. 19 On the View Control Bar. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary.

Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. 24 On the Design Bar. 378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . click Finish Sketch. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Click above the left corner of the lab building.■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. and click.

and click OK. enter Level 2 Aviary. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. and drag it onto the sheet. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 . and click Rename. and click OK. click the Annotation Objects tab. select 9. 28 For Line Pattern. for Name. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. 33 In the Project Browser. select Double Dash. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. 27 Under Matchline.Unnamed. under Floor Plans. for Line Weight. right-click A101 . expand Sheets. click Level 2 . 31 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click OK to accept the default titleblock.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.Aviary.

click View Reference. under Floor Plans. 39 On the Options Bar. for Target view.Aviary is selected. double-click Level 2. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .35 On the Design Bar. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. and place the Level 2 . You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views.Labs dependent view on the sheet. click Modify. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 41 On the Options Bar. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. 45 On the Zoom flyout. 44 On the Design Bar. click Zoom To Fit. for Target view. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.Labs. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. click Modify.

double-click Level 2 . click (Show Crop Region). under Floor Plans. 48 Select the crop region. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference.Aviary. 49 If.46 In the Project Browser. right-click. 47 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. after modifying the annotation crop region. click the far right control. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing.

New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. 55 On the Zoom flyout. 51 On the View Control Bar. 53 In the Select Views dialog. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). expand Level 1. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. right-click Level 2. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . and click OK. click Zoom To Fit. select all views in the list. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. but are not placed on sheets.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). 52 In the Project Browser. 54 In the Project Browser. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. under Floor Plans. and click Apply Dependent Views.

click Zoom To Fit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. right-click South Elevation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click Training Files. and double-click South Elevation. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. 2 In the Project Browser.57 On the Zoom flyout. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . expand Elevations (Building Elevation). you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The matchline is already placed in the view.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser.

enter South Elevation . enter South Elevation . and click OK. 11 Select the crop region. and click OK. for Name. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. select the Crop Region.Left. and click Rename. 7 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. cropping the view to the aviary. for Name. 5 In the drawing area. and drag it toward the center of the view. 9 In the Project Browser. right-click South Elevation. expand South Elevation. 4 In the Rename View dialog.Right. 3 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . click (Hide Crop Region). cropping the view to the lab building.The dependent view opens.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Creating a Perspective View | 403 . Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Perspective View on page 403. click Modify.15 On the Design Bar. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render.

on the View tab of the Design Bar. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open.rvt. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Camera. The perspective view displays. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera.

right-click 3D View 1. as necessary. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. as shown. and select the crop boundary. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. and adjust the field of vision. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. With the camera shown.3 Zoom out. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . and click Show Camera. If the camera is not shown in the view. in the Project Browser. Depending on camera placement.

7 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Exterior . under 3D Views.Day.Day to open the view.6 In the Project Browser. enter Exterior . 8 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and click OK. 10 Save the file. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. right-click 3D View 1. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407.

Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 . Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. modify render settings. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering. You then duplicate the view. and render a daytime view of the exterior. under 3D Views.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. double-click Exterior .rvt.Day.

6 Click OK twice. select Spring Equinox. for Sun. 3pm. You adjust cloud settings as required. 7 In the Rendering dialog. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. 3 In the Rendering dialog. In this case. export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. You create a location and time for the rendering. 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Background. select Sky: Cloudy. NOTE If a background image is required. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. 8 Under Quality. and click Render. click (Show Rendering Dialog).Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar.Santa Monica. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. for Setting. enter Spring Equinox . the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Lighting. for New. and click Rename. select Medium. select Edit/New. 5 In the Rename dialog.

Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. For Files of type.9 In the Rendering dialog. 13 Close the Rendering dialog.png). select Portable Network Graphics (*. Click Save. After the image is rendered. 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. click Show the rendering. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . click Desktop. click Export. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. click Show the model. 10 In the Rendering dialog.

Flat Round : 60W . 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. click New. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. and click OK.Night. on the View Control Bar. click Render. select Exterior: Artificial only.Flat Round : 60W . for Name. and click Artificial Lights. You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog. click OK. verify that Pool Lights is selected.120V. and click Move to Group. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. press and hold SHIFT.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . add 30 :Sconce Light . 16 With the Exterior . enter Pool House Lights.120V through 14 :Sconce Light .Flat Round : 60W .Exterior . click New. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. for Name. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings. Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . select the first light.Day. enter Pool Lights.Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. for Scheme. dialog. 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior . you duplicate the view and change the settings. To select a sequential list. under Lighting. 21 In the Light Groups dialog. under Group Options. right-click Exterior . click Dialog).Flat Round : 60W . under Group Options.Day view to Exterior .Night view open.Night. and click OK. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. under Ungrouped Lights. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . highlight 9 :Sconce Light . add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. and select the last light.120V to the Pool Lights group. 25 Using the same method. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. under 3D Views. 22 Using the same method. under Ungrouped Lights. 27 In the Rendering dialog. and click OK.

33 Proceed to the next lesson. enter 4. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. 32 Save the file. After the image is rendered. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. click Adjust Exposure. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. Rendering an Interior View on page 411. under Image. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. for Exposure Value. In this example. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. and click OK. 31 Close the Rendering dialog. you change the brightness of the exposure. 30 In the Rendering dialog. click Show the model. Rendering an Interior View | 411 .

render the views.rvt. Adding RPC People In this exercise. RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. define the perspective view and rendering settings.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. and finally.

the person’s line of sight. 4 In the Type Selector. ■ (Rotate). under Floor Plans. and on the Edit toolbar. double-click Level 1. and place the component inside the pool house. 5 On the Design Bar. Exact placement is not important. select RPC Female : YinYin.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. Adding RPC People | 413 . 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. 6 Select the figure. click Component. 2 Zoom in to the pool house.

under Parameters. under Identity Data. click Edit/New. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. select Cast Reflections. In order to see the figure’s reflection. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. 14 Save the file. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected.■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. you can enable this option. click Edit. By default. 12 Click OK 3 times. click Modify. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. for Render Appearance Properties. click (Element Properties). 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 9 In the Element Properties dialog.

You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera.15 Proceed to the next exercise. c_Pool_House_in_progress. click Camera. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson.rvt. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process.

You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. under 3D Views. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . right-click 3D View 1. and click Properties. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box. and click OK. 4 In the Project Browser. under Extents. select Section Box.The perspective view displays.

9 In the Project Browser. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. In order to accurately adjust the section box. under Elevations (Building Elevations). 8 In the Project Browser. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . double-click Level 1. you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. 11 In the 3D view. in addition to the 3D view. double-click South. under Floor Plans. select the section box.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.

size the box as shown. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.12 In the floor plan view. 13 In the South Elevation view. 14 In the 3D view. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select the section box. size the box as shown. right-click.

To create a daytime view. and render the interior view. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. doors that contain windows or glass. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration.15 Maximize the 3D view. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. and curtain walls. 17 Save the file. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise.

You can specify a lower quality.Night. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select Interior: Artificial only. 2 In the Rename View dialog. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. 4 In the Rendering dialog. 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . After these settings are established. click (Show Rendering Dialog). select Draft. 3 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. for Setting. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 5 Click Artificial Lights. click Render. clear Pool Lights. under Lighting. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. enter Interior . right-click 3D View 1. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. 7 Under Quality. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. c_Pool_House_in_progress.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 8 In the Rendering dialog.rvt. and click OK. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. you turn them off for this scene. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. under 3D Views. for Scheme.

select Spring Equinox . You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes.9 Close the Rendering dialog. select Edit. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. but the space will receive standard daylighting. select Interior: Sun only. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. You create a view for the interior during the day. Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 . for Scheme. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. For sunlit interiors. 17 In the Rendering dialog. By default they are turned off. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. click Copy To Custom. right-click Interior . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click 14 For Setting. For more information on daylight portals.Santa Monica. select Curtain Walls. in order to turn on daylight portals. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. select Region.Day. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. The preset schemes are read-only. for Daylight Portal Options. for Sun. 3pm. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. 13 In the Rendering dialog. you must create a custom setting. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog.Night. (Show Rendering Dialog). the daylight portals can be turned on. and click OK. In this case. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. and click Render.

In the next steps. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. click Adjust Exposure. and on the Options Bar. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood.18 In the Rendering dialog. Click OK. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. click Show the model. enter 10. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 20 In the Rendering dialog. For Saturation. select the column on the right. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. click Properties). under Image. and close the Rendering dialog. enter 1.

24 In the Materials dialog. and on the Options Bar. For Bump. For Width. select Scale (locked proportions). and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. Click OK. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. click OK. enter 5''. click the dimensions for Size. 30 In the drawing area. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. add a bump map to create texture. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. for Resolution.22 In the Element Properties dialog. under Output Settings. 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. click Settings menu ➤ Materials. enter 90. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. select Unfinished. select Printer. For Rotate. select High. select Wood. 29 In the Rendering dialog. for Setting.6. select Based on wood grain. and click OK. You change the varnish setting. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . clear Region. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. select the crop boundary. 32 In the Rendering dialog. 23 With the column still selected. 28 In the Rendering dialog. As size and DPI are increased. For Amount. the render time increases significantly. 26 Click Update Preview. click (Show Rendering Dialog). and click Render. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled.

which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model.The rendered image displays. you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. In a plan view. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . independent of the Revit Architecture software. or section view. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. The walkthrough path is a spline. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. but you can also define it in a 3D. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. elevation. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. Usually. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames.

right-click in the Design Bar. click Training Files. proceeds through the dining room. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and ends in the far corner of the living room. and change unit formats as desired. and double-click 1st Floor. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. and open Common\c_Townhouse. click Walkthrough. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. expand Views (all). NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. and click the tab in the context menu. click Settings ➤ Project Units.rvt. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . on the Options Bar.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. If you prefer to use metric values. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. verify that Perspective is selected.

Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. and double-click Walkthrough 1.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. on the Options Bar. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Finish. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs.

9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. 11 Under Change. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. If it is not. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. select the crop boundary.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. click Edit Walkthrough. 12 On the View menu. and select the crop boundary. and click OK. 16 On the Options Bar. 14 Click . and for Height. click the dimensions for Size. verify that Field of view is selected. and click OK. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. enter 1. enter 9''. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. enter 16''. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . on the Options Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). for Width. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 17 Click . for Frame.

double-click 1st Floor. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar.The walkthrough plays. and click OK. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Floor Plans. click (Element Properties). The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing.rvt. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. press ESC. clear Far Clip Active. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. c_Townhouse. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. under Extents. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. click Edit Walkthrough. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor.

select Path. 7 Click the third key frame position. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. You can move any camera target or key frame position. and drag it to the location shown. for Controls. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. 6 On the Options Bar. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 .

and click Save. . enter 15. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality.Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. for Compressor. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430.rvt. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. specifying the number of frames. c_Townhouse. for Model Graphics Style. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. under Walkthroughs. on the Options Bar. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. reducing the size of the image. and click OK. When you export the walkthrough. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. click Edit Walkthrough. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. If you are unsure of what option to use. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. The walkthrough is recorded. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click File menu ➤ Save As. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Walkthrough 1. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. select <Shading>. under Output Length. hidden line. or rendering. shading with edges. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. shading. for Frames/sec. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. 9 To play the walkthrough. 3 Under Format. and click OK. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. 8 If you want to save this exercise. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. 431 .Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. More specifically. In this tutorial. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year.

Creating a Solar Study . as shown. A 3D view is created. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .rvt. and double-click 01 Entry. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Camera. expand Views (all). The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. 4 On the View toolbar. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.Courtyard View In this exercise. click Training Files. (SteeringWheels). click shown. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis.

5 On the Design Bar. as shown. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. double-click 01 Entry. right-click 3D View 1. 7 In the Project Browser. click Section. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . and click OK. you create a section cutaway view. click Modify. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. click Save As. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise.Courtyard View. under Floor Plans. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. if necessary. 8 In the Rename View dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. and click Rename. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. enter Solar Study . 3 On the Design Bar. expand 3D Views.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. 9 On the File menu.

and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. as shown. click . click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar.5 On the Design Bar. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. 11 On the SteeringWheel. 13 On the Design Bar. expand Sections. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Rename. right-click Section 1. click 10 On the View toolbar. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 6 To view the section. and click OK. double-click the section head. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. (SteeringWheels). click Modify. 7 In the Project Browser. click Modify.

and click OK. and click OK. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. including the house. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse.14 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry. right-click {3D}. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Rename. then Fine. click Save. In some cases. you create a plan cutaway view. under Floor Plans. clear Section Boxes. 15 In the Rename View dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Project Browser. Typical plan views. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. under 3D Views. 6 In the Rename View dialog. click . On the Annotation Categories tab. do not display many elements in 3D. 16 On the View Control Bar. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. and click Rename. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . 18 On the File menu. click Callout. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. then select Medium. 17 To hide the section box. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. under Floor Plans. 5 In the Project Browser. as shown. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. double-click Callout of 01 Entry.

and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 16 On the View Control Bar. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. 11 On the Design Bar. 15 Select the Roof. click (SteeringWheels). so you can see into the building from the top. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. click Modify. 9 On the SteeringWheel. as shown. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area.8 On the View toolbar. as shown.

Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . 20 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. 21 On the File menu. and click Rename. 19 In the Rename View dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click OK. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.17 On the View Control Bar. click Save. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . right-click {3D}.

click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Los Angeles. 2 On the View Control Bar. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. click . 6 Click the Multi-Day tab.Boston. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. 10 Under Place.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. and time. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. 4 For Sun Position. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 3 Select Cast Shadows. click . You can create a still. select Los Angeles. click click OK. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. enter Summer Solstice. Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. For the Single-Day solar study. Click the Single-Day tab. and time range. you specify the location.Creating Solar Studies . 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . for City. expand 3D Views. USA. For this study. and click Duplicate. expand Views (all). date range. . CA.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. and click OK. leave the slider at 50. For the Multi-Day solar study. date. single-day. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. or multi-day solar study. you specify the location. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 9 In the Name dialog. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. USA is selected. MA.

you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. Los Angeles. Clear Ground Plane at Level. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. ■ For Time Interval. 2 On the View Control Bar. select December 22. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. on the Single-Day tab. and click OK. under Frame. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter 20 and press ENTER.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. 7 On the Options Bar. click Save. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. for Sun Position. enter Winter Solstice. Los Angeles. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. for Date. For Time Range. select June 22. and click Duplicate. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. 2008. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 19 On the File menu. click OK. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. 8 On the Options Bar. 14 In this case. 6 On the View Control Bar. Los Angeles is selected. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. and click OK. confirm that Summer Solstice. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. 16 In the Name dialog. select Winter Solstice. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Under Frame. click OK. and click OK. click . Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439.Courtyard View is currently displayed. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . click . 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. 2008. enter 10 and press ENTER. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 .

PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. click To play the animation from start to finish. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . click OK. and click OK. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. 14 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. approximately as shown. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. on the Single-Day tab. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. select Summer Solstice. Los Angeles. click Text. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.■ To display the next key frame. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. click . Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. for Sun Position. The solar study animation plays. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 13 On the View Control Bar. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry. click To display the next sequential frame. . You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. . ■ To display the previous sequential frame. click .

verify that Cast Shadows is selected. 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. as shown. click . Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . click Lines. click . 8 For Sun Position. 5 In the Project Browser.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. 6 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. Click and enter Dining. as shown. approximately as shown. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. expand 3D Views. On the Options Bar.

and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. ■ For Frames per second. and click OK. select the section box. on the Single-Day tab. as shown. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. select Section Boxes. 12 In the drawing area. and enter 5 to 50. if necessary. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. 15 To hide the section box. 11 To display the section box.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. and click OK. NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . select Frame Range. select Summer Solstice. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. 14 Click outside of the section box. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Los Angeles. clear Section Boxes. under Output Length. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. click OK. verify that the value is set to 15.

4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. for Model Graphics Style. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study.Los Angeles. 3 For Sun Position. and click OK. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Click OK. For Dimensions. select Winter Solstice. For Frames per second. Under Format. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. or frame. To maintain the proportions of the frame. verify that Hidden Line is selected. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. select AVI Files. click OK.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. of the animation separately. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. for Compressor. for Model Graphics Style. To view the animation. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. 2 On the View Control Bar. Los Angeles. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. verify that Hidden Line is selected. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. you open each image. click . under Output Length. select Frame Range. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. For File Name. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. and enter 5 to 10. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. enter 450 in the first field (width). For Files of Type. and click OK.■ ■ Under Format. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. verify that the value is set to 15. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. on the Single-Day tab. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically.

as shown: 9 On the File menu. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. click the Desktop icon. 8 Click Save. under 3D Views. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. TIFF. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson.Los Angeles. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. click Save. For Files of Type. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. or GIF. depending on the Frame Range. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building.■ For Dimensions. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. For File name. or any single-frame format. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. select PNG. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. such as JPEG. Click OK. BMP. In this example. enter 450 in the first field (width). 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen.2 Select the section box in the drawing area. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 . 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. as shown.

USA. click OK. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.Los Angeles .Boston. select One week.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. For Time Interval. and on the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click the Multi-Day tab. for File name enter 2pm . On the Annotation Categories tab. specify 2:00 pm. clear Section Boxes. and click OK. and click OK. 12 In the Name dialog.Week Interval. and click Duplicate. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. for Sun Position. MA. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 5 Select the roof. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. For Time. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . 8 On the View Control Bar.

double-click 01 Entry. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. for Compressor. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 17 On the View Control Bar. such as East . You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . Mirroring the Project In this exercise. and annotations in non-drafting views.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise.South. and click Save. click OK. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Floor Plans. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis. Click the Desktop icon. for File Name. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. model views.West or North . and click OK. When you mirror a project. In the Length/Format dialog. you mirror all model elements.

2 In the drawing area. select East . double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 6 On the Standard toolbar. click OK. right-click. select the roof. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. under 3D Views. For additional information. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. In this exercise. The project is mirrored along the East . and click OK.West. Then. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 5 In the warning dialog. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help.3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project.West axis. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise.

select Summer Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. change the time back to 12:00 PM. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. click . and click OK. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. 8 For Sun Position. specify 11:00 AM for time. click Apply. on the Still tab.3 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. click . select Cast Shadows. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. and click OK. and select Winter Solstice. 5 For Sun Position. click the Still tab. 10 Under Date and Time. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. 11 For Sun Position. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . For example. 12 Under Date and Time. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Orienting to True North | 449 .

14 On the View Control Bar. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). 19 In the Project Browser. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. click OK. under Floor Plans. the view settings must be set for True North. and click OK. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. 18 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. select True North. When a project is started. and select Winter Solstice. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. double-click 01 Entry. This process establishes the view setting to True North. for Orientation. click the Still tab. make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. and click Properties. click OK. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 For Sun Position. right click 01 Entry. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. click .

■ To establish the new direction of True North. click toward the top of the screen. The floor plan rotates in the view. as shown. Orienting to True North | 451 . click above the end of the magenta line representing True North.■ To establish the True North direction.

and click Apply. select True North. select Project North. 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. right-click. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 28 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. right-click 01 Entry. and click OK. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 29 In the Element Properties dialog. select Summer Solstice. 25 In the Project Browser. enter True North Orientation. and click Element Properties. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North.23 In the Project Browser. select True North Orientation. 32 On the View Control Bar. for Orientation. right-click 01 Entry. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the Still tab. and click OK. and click OK. and click Rename. and click Properties. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. 27 In the Rename View dialog. right-click. for Orientation. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . 33 For Sun Position. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.

click the Single-Day tab. Click OK. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. verify that AVI Files is selected. In the Length/Format dialog. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. For Files of Type. and click OK. for Dimensions. Click Save. and click OK. enter 600 in the first field. click OK. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. under Format. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click the Desktop icon. For File Name. Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Los Angeles. click Summer Solstice. for Compressor. Orienting to True North | 453 . The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop.

for Date and Time. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. (Show Rendering Dialog). 3 On the View Control Bar. under Settings. capturing it. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. for Setting. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select Edit/New. In the Name dialog. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . select 12/22. and click Duplicate. 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. Under Lighting. click Render. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. select Interior: Sun only. and exporting it as a JPEG image. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Medium. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. under Quality. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Rendered views do not have this limitation. under 3D Views. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. For Sun. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. select Winter Solstice. under 3D Views.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. and 2:00 PM. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. Since a rendered image is temporary. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. In this exercise. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. for Scheme.

8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. and click Save. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. and click OK. click Export. enter living area_winter solstice. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. For Files of type. click Desktop. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. verify that JPEG Files is selected. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. Rendering an Interior View | 455 .6 In the Rendering dialog. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Save to Project. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project.

456 .

and details. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. a consultant. They include rendering. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. and section boxes. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. or the client. advanced model graphics. Co-house. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. sections. 457 . In this series of exercises. you explore the stylistic approach. For the realistic approach. an outside reviewer. In this tutorial. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. type. linework. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. length. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. Other tools in the software. you can choose between realism and stylistics. elevations. When organizing presentation graphics. Whether the audience is the general contractor. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. however. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. Using the pre-built building model.

458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you create a presentation floor plan. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. To fit the floor plan into the analytique. you create a copy of the plan.

click in the drawing area. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. exit the menu. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Cnst. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. and open Metric\m_Cohouse.rvt. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. click Training Files. 2 In the Project Browser. Cnst. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . right-click 2nd Flr.

11 In the Save As directory. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. dimensions. This turns off the visibility of all tags. and Up Arrow. Down Arrow. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. elevations. navigate to the folder of your choice. click the Scale control and select 1:100. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. this represents the view getting smaller. expand the Stairs category. UP Text. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. 8 Click OK. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. and click Save.rvt. sections. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. click the Annotation Categories tab. No annotations display in the view. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and clear DOWN Text.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 7 Under Visibility. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. and other annotations in this view.

select Boston. specify 10/27. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click . 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. Within a project. select Cast Shadows. For Sun Position. Time and Place. however. the darker the shadows. 3 On the View Control Bar. The higher the number. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click . select By Date. NOTE For this step. If you select a different city. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. 9 For City. 7 For Place. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. click OK. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and select 1st Flr. for Date and Time. you can select any city. specify 35. modify. ■ For Contrast. 1:00 PM. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. double-click it in the Project Browser. 2 On the View Control Bar. you can create. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. 12 Click OK. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. click the Place tab. select Sun and Shadow Settings. on the Still tab. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. Cnst. 6 Under Settings. click (Shadows Off). MA. At that place. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view.rvt.

17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Shadows On).Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. click OK. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. under Settings. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. . for Sun Position. clear Ground Plane at Level. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. and click OK. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast.

click Modify. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. select Arch Portrait. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Views dialog.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click View. TIP If the View tab is not available. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. and click OK. The viewport displays at the cursor. click Sheet. click Add View. and click to place it. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . right-click the Design Bar. and notice the view title. and click Add View to Sheet.

click Edit/New. select No. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. under Graphics. for Show Title. and click OK. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. and click Activate View. click Duplicate. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. enter Presentation. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. To accomplish this. 12 In the Name dialog. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. The viewport no longer displays a view title. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 13 In the Type Properties dialog. For this analytique. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click . and click OK. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet.

and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. and the boundary of the region. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. 18 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. click . 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. click . click Filled Region. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. click Edit/New.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. select Invisible lines. 20 On the Options Bar. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. click Region Properties. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . 22 On the Design Bar. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. When you finish drawing the chain. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. 17 In the Type Selector. and select Chain. fill properties. If necessary.

26 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. under Graphics. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click . for Sheet Name. click Duplicate. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . scroll down. and click Deactivate View. click Finish Sketch.24 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. under Name. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. for Fill Pattern. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. under Identity Data. click OK. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. enter Presentation. enter Solid Black. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. and click OK. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. select Solid fill. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. and click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click View Properties. 25 In the Name dialog. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast.

expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view.rvt. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 .Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. right-click South. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser.

click . select Cast Shadows. click in the Walls row. specify 2:30 PM. Time and Place. and clear Elevation Swing. exit the menu. clear Visible. and click OK. click Duplicate. and click OK. under Visibility. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar.2 In the Project Browser. enter Presentation South Elevation. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click Override. and click OK. 9 Click OK. 14 For Sun Position. under Elevations. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click in the drawing area. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. right-click Copy of South. 13 For Contrast. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. 12 Under Shadow. 16 In the Name dialog. scroll up. click OK. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. expand the Doors category. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. under Settings. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. specify 35. and click Rename. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. 18 For Time. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. select By Date. By changing the angle of the sun. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Visibility. 11 On the View Control Bar. under Pattern Overrides. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. click (Shadows Off). on the Model Categories tab.

click Add View. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise.Presentation. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . 3 In the Views dialog. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. double-click A105 . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select Viewport : Presentation. 5 In the Type Selector. The view title no longer displays.The viewport displays a view title.

You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 9 Proceed with the next lesson.

Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. for Scale. 4 Add the section shown below. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. 3 On the Options Bar. click Section.rvt. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. Cnst. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall).Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and use the flip arrows if necessary. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . select 1: 100. double-click 1st Flr. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Floor Plans.

7 On the Options Bar. To fit correctly in the analytique. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1 : 100. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . for Scale. click Callout. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. expand Sections (Callout 1). as shown.Section 2 is added to the building model. To accomplish this. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view. and double-click Section 2. this view needs to be rotated 180°.

scroll up. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. double-click Presentation Section 2.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Rename View dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). clear Visible. and click OK. 12 In the Project Browser. 15 Under Visibility. 10 In the Project Browser. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 17 Under Visibility. and click Rename. enter Presentation Section 2. click in the Walls row. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click the Model Categories tab. right-click Callout of Section 2. click Modify. and click OK. under Pattern Overrides. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. expand the Doors category. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Sections (Callout 1). click Override. and clear Elevation Swing.

20 Click OK. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. click The crop regions no longer display. (Hide Crop Region).■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 22 On the View Control Bar. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. When you select the crop region. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements.

you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. In addition. select Cast Shadows. 3 On the View Control Bar. click . 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . specify the following: Under Shadow. specify 35. under Sections (Callout 1). you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 2 On the View Control Bar. double-click Presentation Section 2. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ For Sun Position.rvt. and click OK. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. The shadows do not offer much contrast. click Duplicate. Click Apply. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. In the steps that follow.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. For Contrast. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). and click Advanced Model Graphics. in the Project Browser. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 6 In the Name dialog.

select Directly. NOTE The line style. click (Shadows On). specify 70°. Click OK. select Silhouette Edges. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Azimuth. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. For Altitude. Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. for Silhouette style. was added to this training file for training purposes. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. Select Relative to View. and click Advanced Model Graphics. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. click OK. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . and click OK. specify 135°. Silhouette Edges.

and click Add View to Sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .rvt. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. select Section: Presentation Section 2. and click to place the selected view. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. click Add View.Presentation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Views dialog. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise.

and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. 9 On the Edit toolbar. you click to specify the start radius. Using a clock as a reference. To rotate an object. under Sections (Callout 1).5 In the Type Selector. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. and press Enter. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. In the steps that follow. The view title no longer displays. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. click (Rotate). Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Design Bar. The section needs to be rotated 180°. click Modify. select Viewport : Presentation. double-click Section 2. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise.

Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. under Sheets (all). double-click A105 . 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned.Presentation.The callout rotates 180°. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser.

15 On the Design Bar. After applying the view template to a new section view. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. click Modify. and drag it up and to the left as shown.

Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. you can simply apply the presentation view template. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sections (Callout 1). enter Presentation. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. under Sections (Type 1). 4 In the View Templates dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click OK. double-click Presentation Section 2. 3 In the New View Template dialog. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Type 1). and click OK. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . enter Presentation Section 1.rvt. and click OK. right-click Section 1. right-click Copy of Section 1.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 7 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename.

13 Place it to the left of the plan view. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.Presentation. and click OK. annotations. select Viewport : Presentation. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. 12 In the Views dialog. under Graphics. click Add View. under Names.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. select Presentation. lighting fixtures. 15 Right-click the viewport. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 18 Right-click the viewport. 14 In the Type Selector. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . select Section: Presentation Section 1. and click Activate View. and click Add View to Sheet. for Rotation on Sheet. and click OK. and click Deactivate View. The furniture. and elevation swings no longer display. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). select 90° Counterclockwise. double-click A105 . 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown.

484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In this exercise. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. traditional analytiques contain a detail. Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. such as a tracery window or a column capital. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically.

and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. and click Rename. click Modify.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Callout. After you add the callout. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). select the callout. as shown. 4 In the Project Browser.rvt. right-click Callout of Section 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sections (Type 1). 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. double-click Section 1. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 .

9 In the Element Properties dialog. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Extents.5 In the Rename View dialog. clear Crop Region Visible. under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Presentation Callout. 8 Right-click. and click View Properties. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. and click OK. enter Presentation Callout. clear Annotation Crop. as shown. 7 Select the crop region.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale. 15 On the Design Bar.Presentation. select Custom. select Section: Presentation Callout. and click Add View to Sheet. For Scale Value 1. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Add View. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 .Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Type Selector. Click OK. and click Activate View. specify 22. select Viewport : Presentation. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. under Sheets (all). click Modify. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. double-click A105 . 12 In the Views dialog.

When finished. under Sections (Callout 1). 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. and click Deactivate View. double-click Presentation Callout. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. 23 On the Design Bar.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. click Edit/New. In the steps that follow. and make adjustments as necessary. click Region Properties. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. and move it to the position shown below. click Filled Region. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. activate the viewport. 24 In the Element Properties dialog.

and click Activate View.Presentation. double-click A105 . select Solid fill. click Finish Sketch. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . 28 In the Project Browser. 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. for Fill Pattern. on the Design Bar.25 In the Type Properties dialog. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. and click OK 3 times. click . sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. under Sheets (all). 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Filled Region. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. When you are finished. You do not have to replicate the image exactly.

The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 33 On the View Control Bar. and sketch the rectangle shown below. click Finish Sketch. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 34 Select the crop region. 32 On the Design Bar. click (Show Crop Region).31 On the Options Bar. click . and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays.

Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . and click Deactivate View. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. click (Hide Crop Region). 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. 38 Proceed with the next lesson.35 On the View Control Bar.

you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways. 3 On the View Control Bar. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. and apply shadows to the views. click (Shadows Off). Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. click the Scale control. under 3D Views.rvt. and click 1 : 200. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 5 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. double-click Isometric.

specify 135°. select Silhouette Edges. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. For Azimuth. For Contrast. Select Ground Plane at Level. in the list. and click OK. For Altitude. 13 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . 15 In the Rename View dialog. specify 45°. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. under 3D Views. under Extents. select Section Box. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. for Silhouette style. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. and click Rename. select Cast Shadows. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. Select Relative to View. double-click Isometric 2. 8 In the Name dialog. Click OK. Cnst. under 3D Views. enter Isometric 1. and click Rename. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under 3D Views. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select Directly. right-click Isometric. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 14 In the Project Browser. Select 1st Flr. and click OK. specify 35. For Sun Position. under 3D Views. enter Isometric 2. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. A section box displays around the building model. right-click Isometric 1. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. click .

These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. click Modify on the Design Bar. When you are finished. Grips display on each face of the section box. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. as shown.19 Select the section box. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . You can use this to rotate the section box.

and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify on the Design Bar. and click Rename. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. 25 To hide the section box. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. 29 To hide the section box. and click OK. right-click Isometric 2. select Viewport : Presentation. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. clear Section Boxes. under 3D Views. 22 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Rename View dialog. you can adjust the plane location. enter Isometric 3. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. under 3D Views.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. under 3D Views.Presentation. When you are finished. 24 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 21 In the Project Browser. On the Annotation Categories tab. under 3D Views. double-click Isometric 3. If desired. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. make a copy of the view. and click OK. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. In the Type Selector. 31 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. double-click Isometric 2. Next. clear Section Boxes. On the Annotation Categories tab. under Sheets (all). drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. 27 Select the section box. the stairs and railings may display. The section box no longer displays. double-click A105 .

The filled region partially covers the view. under 3D Views. In the Type Selector.32 In the Project Browser. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. select Viewport : Presentation. select Viewport : Presentation. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In the Type Selector. under 3D Views. 33 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown.

click Edit. The image below shows the redrawn lines. select Concrete. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. select Transparent. 42 Using the drawing tools. click Edit/New. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 On the Design Bar. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 35 Select the poche filled region. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . 36 On the Design Bar. 39 For Background. click Lines. for Fill Patterns. This will make it easier to draw lines.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 40 Click OK twice. On the Options Bar. and click Activate View. click Region Properties. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process.

46 Click OK twice. 47 On the Design Bar. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click Finish Sketch. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499. for Fill Pattern. click Edit/New. 45 In the Type Properties dialog.43 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. and click Deactivate View. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. select Solid fill.

Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. double-click 1st Flr. The view opens immediately. you create the final view for the analytique. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. Cnst.rvt. then you specify the eye direction and range. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . click Camera. you add it to the presentation sheet. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. a cutaway perspective view.

specify 35. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. for Name. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. for Silhouette style. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 6 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Cast Shadows. specify the following: Under Shadow. and click OK. For Contrast. For Sun Position. and click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click . select Silhouette Edges.

A section box now cuts through the building model. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . and click OK. Grips display on each plane of the section box. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. 12 Select the section box. 13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image. select Section Box.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.

Presentation. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. click (Hide Crop Region). and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 19 To hide the section box. clear Section Boxes. and click OK. under Change. click Size. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In the Type Selector. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. select Scale (locked proportions). On the Annotation Categories tab. 17 Under Model Crop Size. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Project Browser.14 Select the crop region. enter 165 mm. you must specify the actual size of the image. under Sheets (all). under 3D Views. double-click A105 . 18 On the View Control Bar. for Width. select Viewport : Presentation. Because scale does not apply to perspective views.

4 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. select Text : Title. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. select a font. specify a text size of 40 mm. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . and click OK. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. under Text. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. click OK. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. click Duplicate. double-click it in the Project Browser. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. enter Title. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. enter Description. 6 In the Name dialog. and click OK.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click . 23 Proceed with the next exercise.Presentation sheet is not the active view. click Text. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.22 Click File menu ➤ Save. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. click Edit/New. select the same font as the title. specify a text size of 6 mm. under Text.

This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. select Text : Description. 16 In the Type Selector. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

curtain walls. Once the model has been imported. 507 . and roofs.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. you create a small building from the front mass form. such as walls. that compose the building. After you import the SketchUp model. you can easily add detail with Revit components. you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family. In this tutorial. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements.

This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. For Files of type. Double-click the Common folder. enter Import SketchUp. 10 In the Name dialog. click Training Files. click Browse. For Layers. 6 In the Save As dialog. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. enter SketchUp Model. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 2 In the New Project dialog. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. For Import units. under Template file. visible elements. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. select All. select Preserve. select SketchUp Files. Click the Sketchup file. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Auto-Detect. and click Save. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. For Colors. and click OK. or select from a list. you create a Revit Architecture project.skp.rte. click Create Mass.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. click OK. click OK. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. click the Massing tab. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. buildings. right-click in the Design Bar. 4 In the New Project dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 9 In the informational dialog. for File name. and not in the library.

14 On the View toolbar. ■ ■ For Positioning. click . The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements. such as walls. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . select Manual . click the Close button.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. Level 1 is the only choice. Click Open. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. click Finish Mass. For Place at level. 17 In the warning dialog. curtain walls. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. and roofs.Center. select Level 1. 16 On the Design Bar. In a new project. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. depending on the complexity of the project. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from.

curtain walls. After you create the building from the mass faces. and roofs.18 Proceed to the next exercise. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. verify Level 2 is selected.400mm displays. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. for Level. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design. select the face so that it highlights in red. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 4 On the Options Bar. and on the View Control Bar. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . verify Basic Roof: Generic . 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. such as walls. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. click Roof by Face. 3 In the Type Selector. that compose the building. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . click Create Roof. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 9 On the Options Bar. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. To see the new roof. on the View toolbar. click to display masses. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. click Create Roof.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. verify that Select Multiple is selected.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. 6 On the Options Bar. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. on the Options Bar. A roof is created from the mass face.

■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click Roof by Face. click Create Roof. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.

20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. select Core Face: Exterior. 16 On the View toolbar. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass.200mm displays. click Wall by Face. verify Basic Wall: Generic . 21 On the Design Bar. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 23 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Type Selector.15 On the Design Bar. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. for Loc Line. click roofs that you created. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. click Modify to end the command.

514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click Curtain System by Face. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Type Selector. 26 Click to redisplay the masses.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 25 On the View toolbar. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. click to view only the walls and roofs. 29 Select the left face of the left mass.

create the 2 curtain systems shown below. 31 Using the same technique.30 On the Options Bar. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. click Create System. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. 32 On the View toolbar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 .

click Create Roof. 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. click Curtain System. click Roof by Face. click Create System. and select it. click Wall by Face.35 On the Design Bar. select the other wall. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. 38 Select the mass face shown below. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. and on the Options Bar. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. and on the Options Bar. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar.

specify a point to place the camera.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. 42 On the View toolbar. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. click Wall by Face. click to view the building that you have created. Below the right corner of the view. and select the mass face shown below. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. under Floor Plans. click Camera. 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 .

The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. roofs. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. The perspective view created by the camera displays.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. 48 On the View toolbar. click your building in the view. specify a point for the camera target. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. to view only the walls. Click the frame to display its grips. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. as shown.

Click OK. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. select Center. click Modify. click . click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Under Grid 2 Pattern. select Center. Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. 50 On the Options Bar.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. and select the left curtain system in the view. for Justification. for Justification. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . Under Grid 1 Pattern.

56 In the Project Browser. 55 Right-click. double-click {3D}. and move the roof edges as shown below. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. under 3D Views.54 Select each roof to display its grips. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. 63 In the Type Selector. click Door. 59 On the View toolbar. under 3D Views. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. and click Cancel to end the command. double-click 3D View 1. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 .64 Add doors to the building as shown below. 65 Save and close the drawing.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

you create a curtain system using the wall command. or you can use a specific curtain system command. panel. Like windows. and you can change these elements individually. you select the grid. To switch panel types. and they are not windows. You can add curtain systems with the wall command.rvt. and mullions. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. you need to change the length of the wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Unlike windows. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. click Training Files. Like walls. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. This affects the entire curtain system. to resize the system. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. grid lines.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. you need to select a panel. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. 525 . To change grids. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. For example.

5 Start the curtain system where shown. click Wall. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 4 In the Type Selector. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Ground Floor. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1.1 In the Project Browser. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .

7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. and double-click Southeast Isometric. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Creating an Entrance | 527 . 8 In the Project Browser.

528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . For Top Offset. enter 1200. and room bounding. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems.11 Select the curtain system. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. Click OK. top constraint. top and base attachments. and click (Properties). using curtain grids. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF.

click Modify. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 25 On the Design Bar. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. and click Rename. click Elevation. right-click Elevation 1 . 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. under Floor Plans. Creating an Entrance | 529 . 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 18 In the Project Browser.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. click Curtain Grid. 20 In the drawing area. and click OK. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. and resize the crop boundary as shown.a.

FOURTH FLOOR. select SECOND FLOOR. while pressing CTRL. and SEVENTH FLOOR. Click to create a vertical grid. click Modify. THIRD FLOOR. SIXTH FLOOR. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. one larger than the other. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. 33 On the Design Bar. FIFTH FLOOR. click Curtain Grid. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. and click OK. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights.26 While pressing CTRL. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. Click to place another grid line.

you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. you add a doorway to the curtain system. The segment line style changes to dashed. and then select the segment above it. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. Instead of using the Door command. click Add or Remove Segments. 35 Select the left vertical grid line.Next. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. The two segments are removed. and on the Options Bar. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. Creating an Entrance | 531 .

40 On the Options Bar. and lock them. 42 Place dimensions as shown.38 Using the same method. click Curtain Grid. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . select One Segment. 39 On the Design Bar.

You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. Creating an Entrance | 533 . 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 43 Delete the dimensions. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. Use the following image as a guide. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. click in any white space to exit the editor. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained.

534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the new curtain system you added. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. click view. Now. under Elevations. 54 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. not as curtain panels. 55 In the Project Browser. double-click Entrance Elevation. click Training Files. These panels schedule as doors.Next. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. under Floor Plans. click Modify. The panel changes to a double door. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors.rfa. 56 In the Project Browser. . 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. This changes the graphics style of the Next. 57 On the View Control Bar. 52 On the Type Selector. and click Wireframe. They are part of the curtain panel category. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family.

67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. click System Panel : Solid. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. click . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 61 With the panel still selected. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. 63 Click OK twice. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. 65 On the View Control Bar. and the solid panels display in white. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. Creating an Entrance | 535 .60 On the Type Selector. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. The glazed panels display in blue.

Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Save As. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. select Entire Grid Line. click Mullion.68 On the File menu. 4 On the Options Bar. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. 2 On the Options Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise.rvt. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. select Grid Line Segment.

6 On the Options Bar. clickModify. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. so you remove them next. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . because their width reduces the size of the doors. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. 10 Delete the mullions below them. You are going to change some mullion joins. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. select All Empty Segments. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. however. there are a few that you do not want. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors.

you can also right-click. 15 On the Design Bar. Finally. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. click Modify. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. This completes the exercise for adding mullions.Two mullion join controls display. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. 17 Save the file. 16 In the Project Browser. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. 14 Click the top mullion control. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. 538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . double-click Southeast Isometric.

under Floor Plans. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. double-click GROUND FLOOR. (Arc passing through three points). you add a curtain system using the wall command. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. 7 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Click OK. enter 1200. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. Finally. click Wall. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. for Top Constraint. Curved Curtain System | 539 . 4 In the Type Selector. For Top Offset. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system.

11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Divide the halves into quarters.10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. double-click East. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 14 In the Project Browser. and then sixteenths. click Curtain Grid. eighths. Next. you place grids on the system. under Elevations. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. You are going to use one of these snaps points.

you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. to filter out all 19 Save the file. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. Next. click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. you change some panels in the system. select the bottom layer of panels.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. select Basic Wall: Generic . and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise.300mm. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system.

clear Chain. 9 Select the extrusion. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. 3 In the Project Browser. . 8 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. click Model Lines. enter 100.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. click . click Lines.rft. click Finish Sketch. double-click Exterior. and on the Options Bar. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. select Glass. and click . 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click OK. 4 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. for Depth. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 12 On the Options Bar. and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel.

21 In the Type Selector.rfa.Pattern. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. under Floor Plans. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. click (Default 3D View). 18 Load the Curtain Panel .rfa family. select Curtain Panel . 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 23 Right-click. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 24 On the View toolbar. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 . All fourth floor panels are selected. 19 In the Project Browser.Pattern. (SteeringWheels). double-click FOURTH FLOOR. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. right-click. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click 25 On the View toolbar. and save the family as Curtain Panel .Pattern. and return to the project file. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. click Modify. and click Change Walls Orientation.14 On the Design Bar.

The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. 30 Save the file. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. All the panels change to the solid panel. right-click.Solid. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . select System Panel . 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. under Floor Plans. All fifth floor panels are selected. 29 In the Type Selector. 27 In the Project Browser. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. The finished arc wall should look like the following image.

2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Select Radius. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. click Training Files. enter 8. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. click Mullion. . you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. and select it. For vertical mullions. and click OK. for Profile Usage. 1 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). Click again to specify the ending point. under Elevations. click ■ ■ For Sides.rft.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click East. 8 On the Design Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . except at the GROUND FLOOR level. click Lines. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. select Mullion. and enter 50 mm for the radius.

30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 28 On the View toolbar. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system.detail. and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. clear Coarse and Medium. click Modify. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. click Mullion. and click OK. under 3D Views. and return to the project file. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . it can be added as a mullion type. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. After the new profile is loaded. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view.rfa. click (SteeringWheels). 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . clear Fine. double-click Southeast Isometric. 27 In the Project Browser. and click Visibility. 13 On the Options Bar.rfa. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 20 Select the detail component. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Detail Component. click Training Files. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close.rfa family. click Modify. 31 Click .11 On the Design Bar. click Visibility.

42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. click Modify. 40 On the Design Bar. select Circular Mullion for Family. double-click GROUND FLOOR. click Duplicate. so you remove the unwanted ones. and click OK.32 In the Element Properties dialog. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. You have placed more mullions than you want. 43 Press DELETE. 36 Under Construction. 41 In the Project Browser. 37 Click OK twice. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . under Floor Plans. select All Empty Segments. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. right-click. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 33 Click Edit/New. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 44 Save the file. for Profile. 38 On the Options Bar.

and you can click to select them all. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. make custom curtain panels and mullions. TIP To chain select all the walls. double-click TOP OF ROOF. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. All the inside faces highlight. click Pick Walls. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and press TAB. and then apply those custom elements to the system. 1 In the Project Browser.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. you learned to create a curved curtain system. select Defines slope. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. 5 On the Options Bar. and a ruled curtain system. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Design Bar. a storefront system. In this lesson.

18 Save the file. 14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 17 On the View Control Bar. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family.7 On the Design Bar. Click OK. Sloped Glazings | 549 . select Entire Grid Line. 10 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. enter 600. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. click Finish Roof. click Modify. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. click Mullion. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. 11 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. click Roof Properties.

3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 4 In the Type Selector. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system.Storefront System In this exercise. and enter 2400. select Unconnected for Height. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. click Wall. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

enter 10200 mm. To see how the grid layout is defined. For this wall. which is specified in the type. 9 On the Design Bar. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. and press ENTER. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. click Edit/New. under 3D Views. Storefront System | 551 . 13 In the Element Properties dialog. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. even if the wall height changes. and click . This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. 10 In the Project Browser. The curtain wall cuts the original wall. This specifies an exact length for the wall. 8 Click the temporary dimension. double-click Southeast Isometric. 12 Select the storefront wall. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. click Modify. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall.

In this exercise. Angle. Justification. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you find Number. select All Empty Segments. enter 15. 1 In the Project Browser. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. or end. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. center. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. 16 Click OK. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. click Mullion. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. double-click Southeast Isometric. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. under 3D Views. 19 Select a curtain grid. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. 18 On the Options Bar. By setting the Angle value. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. and Offset. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. 20 Save the file. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. see the Revit Architecture help.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout.

click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. and highlight the model line. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. Curtain System by Lines | 553 . 6 Click the highlighted line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.3 On the View Control Bar. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

click Curtain Grid. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 10 Select the panel. A panel between the 2 lines is created. click Modify. and click . you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. Next. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.8 Select the highlighted line. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 11 Click OK.

16 In the Type Selector. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. and then eighths. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. and define a ruled curtain system. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. right-click. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. select System Panel : Solid. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. and then eighths. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. Finally. quarters. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. quarters. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. embed a curtain system inside another wall. 18 Save the file.

556 .

shed. In addition. You do not need to create the work plane. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. gutters. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. Before you can sketch the roof profile.rvt. In this lesson. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. 557 . and low sloped roofs. including hip. gable.Roofs 15 In this lesson. click Training Files. you learn how to add fascia. you learn to create several different types of roofs. and soffits to the roofs that you create. mansard. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. and open Metric\m_Roofs. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. In this tutorial. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion.

1 In the Project Browser. click the blue square on the witness line. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. and double-click Level 1. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. centerline. 4 Click OK. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. select Name. click Ref Plane. expand Views (all). and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. 5 In the Go To View dialog. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. and click OK. and so on). TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 . 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls.

Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. select Chain. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. 13 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile.Next. sketch the roof profile. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 16 On the View toolbar.

click (Join/Unjoin Roof). 18 Select the edge of the roof. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. The roof should resemble the following illustration. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. press CTRL. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. click Modify. expand Sections (Type 1). use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. and select the second wall. expand Views (all). 21 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the exterior face of the wall. Next. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. 19 On the Tools toolbar. press TAB. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). and double-click Section 1. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway.

26 On the View toolbar. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. (Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. click Attach for Top/Base. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562.24 On the Options Bar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click model.

You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. Next. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level.rvt. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines.You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. m_Roofs. expand Views (all). click Pick Walls. 5 On the Options Bar. verify that Defines slope is selected. and double-click Garage Roof. expand Floor Plans. 3 In the Project Browser. and click Yes. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 . and enter 600 for Overhang. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. sketch the roof footprint. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch.

8 On the Options Bar. click Modify. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 14 When you see the informational dialog. click the model. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. By default. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. Next. clear Defines slope. 13 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 On the View toolbar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 Press CTRL. and click OK. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. click (Properties). under Dimensions. and on the Options Bar.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select both slope definition lines. click Finish Roof.

1 In the Project Browser.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. click Pick Walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. and enter 600 for Overhang. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . and double-click Level 3. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. clear Defines slope. expand Views (all). NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. When you complete the roof. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. m_Roofs.rvt. and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. press TAB.

click Modify. Next. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 10 On the View menu.6 Click to select all the walls. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. click (Rectangle). click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 15 On the Options bar. select Defines Slope. Next. click Lines. 9 Using automatic snaps. click Finish Roof. select Defines Slope. sketch the chimney opening. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 8 On the Options Bar. 17 When you see the informational dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. add new slope lines to the roof.

Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. expand Views (all). you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. and double-click Level 2. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model.18 On the View toolbar. click Pick Walls. 1 In the Project Browser. select Defines slope. and enter 600 for Overhang. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.

6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. select the left vertical slope definition line. Next. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep.5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. and click (Pick Lines). 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Next. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 To trim the first line segment. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. click Lines. 9 On the Tools toolbar. clear Defines Slope. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. click (Trim/Extend). close the roof sketch. using the following illustration for guidance. 7 On the Options Bar.

and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click Roof Properties. 14 Under Constraints. Next.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. 18 On the Design Bar. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. click (SteeringWheels). click Finish Roof. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. and click OK. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. click (Default 3D View) to display the model.

Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof.21 Click (SteeringWheels). 25 Proceed to the next exercise. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. join the two remaining walls to the roof. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 23 On the Tools toolbar. Next. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration.

click Pick Walls. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . and double-click Level 2. Next. and enter 300 for Overhang. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. expand Views (all). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. m_Roofs. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. select the left vertical roof line. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Options Bar. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls.rvt. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 6 On the Options Bar. clear Defines Slope. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way.Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. press TAB. click (Trim/Extend). You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. enter 0 for Overhang. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 To trim the first line segment. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 1 In the Project Browser.

1 In the Project Browser. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the View toolbar. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. (SteeringWheels). 16 Under Constraints. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. you add a slope-defining line. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . select Defines slope. Next. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click 3D. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. m_Roofs. expand Views (all). and press ENTER.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. click 20 On the View toolbar. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Roof Properties. and click OK. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker.rvt. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. expand 3D Views.

and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. 5 On the View menu. expand Views (all). add two new slope arrows. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. 11 On the Design Bar. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 4 In the Project Browser. verify ■ (Draw) is selected. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines Slope. Next. expand Floor Plans. Next. click Modify. 9 On the Tools menu. click Split Walls and Lines.2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. Before you can add slope arrows. 14 On the Options Bar. To help locate the position of each split. you need to add two reference planes. 3 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. and double-click Level 2. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. click Slope Arrow. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. and enter 600 for Offset. click (Pick Lines). Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 .

and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 500 for Rise/1000. and move the cursor to place the arrow. click Edit. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. When you sketch a hip roof. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. m_Roofs. (Properties). select both slope arrows.15 to add the second slope arrow. and then click OK. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 20 Under Dimensions. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. the adjacent eave heights must align. click Modify. select Slope for Specify. 18 Press CTRL. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 16 Repeat steps 13 . and click 19 Under Constraints.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps.rvt. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. When eave heights differ. 3 On the Options Bar. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. and double-click Garage Roof.

Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . 5 On the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. 13 On the View toolbar. 12 On the Design Bar. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. click Align Eaves. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. When aligning eaves. select a method to align the eaves. select Defines Slope. on the File menu. 14 If you want to save your changes. Next. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. click Save As. under Dimensions. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Finish Roof. (Properties). 10 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. and click OK. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). The eave lines display with a dimension.

click Modify. 3 Select the roof and. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click North. on the Options Bar. click Training Files. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. (Properties). expand Views (all).rvt. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . under Constraints. expand Elevations. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level.

click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click . click Finish Roof. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.6 On the View toolbar. Next. and double-click Level 3. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. click Modify. and then select Defines slope. and click OK. click Lines. Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. 7 In the Project Browser. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. expand Views (all). and select the remaining three lines. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. 10 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. 14 On the Options Bar. click (Pick Lines). 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. under Dimensions.

Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. click Save As. you add a roof to a building shell. click mansard roof.17 On the View toolbar. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. click Training Files. on the File menu. After you add the roof. and save the exercise file with a unique name.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise.

click Pick Walls. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. 3 On the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. verify that Defines slope is not selected. 5 In the drawing area. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . double-click Roof. under Floor Plans. select the interior face of the curved wall on the right.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. 4 On the Options Bar.

8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. click (Trim/Extend). for Type. 11 On the Design Bar. select Steel Truss . click Finish Roof. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . and click OK. Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch. click Roof Properties.Because the walls are not continuous.Insulation on Metal Deck .EPDM. 7 On the Tools toolbar. you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls.

double-click the section head to open the section view. The roof has been created. click (Draw Split Lines). 16 On the Options Bar. and click to select it. 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. double-click Roof. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. In the next steps.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently.

17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. 18 Move the cursor down. 19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. 20 Using the same method. and select a point on the opposite roof line. move the cursor horizontally to the left. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs .

you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. Next. 23 On the Options Bar. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . In this exercise. You modify the points individually. click (Modify Sub-Elements). Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section. Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. on the Options Bar. exact placement of the points is not important. (Add points).

click (Modify Sub-Elements). 25 Using the same method. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. enter -2''. for the dimension. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof.

and on the Options Bar. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. 29 On the Design Bar. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. and select all of the roof edges. 31 Select the roof slab. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . click (Properties). click Modify. and press ENTER. including the interior edges of the roof regions.27 Press and hold CTRL. for Elevation. enter 4''.

The entire slab is sloped. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. click Edit. you can easily create its fascia. 37 If you want to save your changes. After you create a roof. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. 35 Click OK 3 times. 36 View the results in the section view.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. you learn how to create roof fascia. click Edit/New. gutters. select Variable. In some cases this type of slope is desired. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. for Structure. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and Soffits on page 586. Gutters. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. under Construction. on the File menu. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. gutters. Gutters. Creating Fascia. Creating Fascia. By making the insulation layer variable. and soffits. and soffits in Revit Architecture. and save the exercise file with a unique name. for the Thermal/Air Layer. click Save As. and Soffits In this lesson. 32 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK twice.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. click (Properties). 3 Press CTRL. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.rfa. and open Common\c_Condominium. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. under Construction. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. 8 In the Name dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK.rvt. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. and click Open. click Training Files. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. enter Built-up Fascia.

11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 2 On the Options Bar. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. Creating Gutters on page 588. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. click (Properties). 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs . Creating Gutters In this exercise. c_Condominium.rvt. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 Proceed to the next exercise.

select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. . select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. under Construction.3 In the Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. and click OK three times. 10 Click to place the gutter. click in the Value field for Material. Creating Soffits on page 590. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. click Edit/New. and click OK. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. Creating Gutters | 589 .

expand Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you learn how to place a roof soffit. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Roof. 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. 3 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views. click Pick Roofs. c_Condominium. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs .rvt.Creating Soffits In this exercise.

and then select the soffit to join them. click Join Geometry. and double-click 3D. expand 3D Views. 6 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. Creating Soffits | 591 . 7 On the Tools menu. 8 Select the roof. expand Views (all). Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. click Finish Sketch.4 Select the roof.

9 If you want to save your changes. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 592 | Chapter 15 Roofs . on the File menu. click Save As.

select Square meters. Click OK. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. 593 . your values will be different. and open Common\c_Area. 2 In the Project Units dialog. select Millimeters.rvt. Finally. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. select mm. under Length. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. click Training Files. 3 Under Area. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. click Project Units.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. In the final exercise. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. For Unit Suffix. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. If you are using metric units. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson.

There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. select 2 decimal places. click OK. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. 9 Click Cancel. click the Area Schemes tab. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. 4 In the Project Units dialog. or 0. click the Room Calculations tab. For Unit Suffix. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. expand Views (all). TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. click Settings. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. select m2. the system-computed height defaults to the level. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme.■ ■ ■ For Rounding. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. right-click in the Design Bar. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. it is not necessary in this exercise. Click OK. These schemes define spatial relationships. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. and click Room and Area. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated.

click Area Plan. When you select Yes in this dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. To modify the area. click Area. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. forming a closed loop. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . If you select No. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. Click OK. rather than the area tag. under Views (all).Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you must select one of the reference lines. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. 13 In the Project Browser. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. 12 When the informational dialog displays. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). you must manually add these boundary lines.

click Area Boundary. When you pick the walls. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. common areas. When you add area boundary lines. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. and store area. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. you can either draw them or pick them. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. you create a new area plan for rentable space. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. click Area Plan. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 21 On the Options Bar. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). Expand Area Plans (Rentable). Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. If you do not select this option. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. Next. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. the area boundary lines do not update automatically.

Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 .23 On the Design Bar. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. and click to select the area. do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click Area. Select Office area for Area Type. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. 25 On the Design Bar. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 27 On the Options Bar. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. click ■ ■ . click Modify.

30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. click Modify and select the area. click Area. 32 On the Options Bar. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . 29 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. Select Office area for Area Type. 31 On the Design Bar. click ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. In the Element Properties dialog. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall.■ Click OK. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name.

enter Core for Name. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. 35 Add an area to the building model core. and select Store Area for Area Type. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type.■ Click OK. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 . Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4.

click Color Scheme Legend. In the next exercise. and click Save. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule.Notice that within the two store areas. click Save. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . name the project Area-in progress. and click to place the legend. 37 On the File menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. In this exercise. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces.

5 In the New Schedule dialog. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . click the Fields tab. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. under Category. and click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. 7 Under Available fields. select Areas (Rentable).3 When the dialog displays. select Area Type and click Add. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes.

602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.9 Click OK.

and perimeter information. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. and roofs. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. building elements. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. floors. curtain systems. You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. In this tutorial. After creating mass floors. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. After you make building elements. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. If you modify a massing face. you then need to update the building face. floor. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. or both. At any time. you can specify the view to display massing elements. and floors. You assign the default wall. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. 603 . you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. roofs. volume. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project.

and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. sweeps. click Create Mass. under Views (all). you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and cutting geometry. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. and click Massing. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. click Training Files. double-click Level 1. 5 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Floor Plans.

(Pick Lines). click Lines. double-click Level 1. 8 On the Design Bar. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. click the value for Material. 13 On the View toolbar. click Extrusion Properties. and on the Options Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. enter 25000. select Mass (Opaque). under Materials and Finishes. under Views (all). for Offset. click (Default 3D View). click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. 15 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the Materials dialog. click Finish Sketch. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Constraints. click 18 On the Options Bar. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. (Line). click Lines. for Name. for Extrusion End. and click OK. and click . This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 . under Floor Plans. enter 1550 mm. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

press TAB to highlight the entire face. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. select Pick a plane. click Extrusion Properties. 25 On the Design Bar. TIP If necessary. 23 In the Materials dialog. and click . under Views (all). under Materials and Finishes. enter 27500. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. The second form is on top of the first form. and click OK. under Constraints.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . double-click West. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. select Mass (Transparent). double-click {3D} to see the results. 28 On the Design Bar. 30 In the drawing area. for Name. highlight the larger form. and click OK. for Extrusion End. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. and click OK. enter 25000. under Views (all). 21 On the Design Bar. click the value for Material. click Finish Sketch. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. for Extrusion Start. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 26 In the Project Browser.

and click to select the line start point.31 Click to select the face. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . Next. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. click Lines. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. (Pick Lines). 37 On the Options Bar. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. and on the Options Bar. click (Draw). 34 On the Options Bar. click (Arc passing through three points). and clear Chain.

double-click East. 41 On the Edit toolbar. 45 In the Project Browser. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. (Line).TIP If you do not see this option. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. click Modify. under Views (all). click (Move). click Edit Top. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. and delete the vertical construction line. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. on the Options Bar. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. click Lines and. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 39 On the Design Bar. 46 On the Design Bar. 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line.

50 On the Design Bar. and that -92000 is specified for Second End. click Blend Properties. for Material. In this exercise. 52 On the Design Bar. 53 On the View toolbar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . (Arc passing through three points). and click OK. click Finish Sketch. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. click 49 Create an arc as shown. click (Default 3D View). verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model.48 On the Options Bar. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. In the next exercise. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created.

and select Chain. m_Massing_Start. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. click Ref Plane. under Views (all). Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options bar.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. as shown. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. 10 On the Options Bar. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. 9 On the Design Bar. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. click (Line). place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right.rvt. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. 1 In the Project Browser. select the mass. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. 2 In the drawing area. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. 7 Using the same technique. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. click Lines.

15 Click OK. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. for Extrusion End. snap the corners to the intersections. 16 On the Design Bar. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. 17 On the View toolbar. 14 Under Constraints. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. In this exercise. 13 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. Using Swept Blends | 611 . click (Default 3D View). enter 0. on the View Control Bar.NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Finish Sketch. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. When sketching each extrusion.

and click Lines. m_Massing_Start. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. double-click Level 1. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. select a point below the mass elements. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Design Bar. ■ For the radius.rvt. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). 4 On the Options Bar. click Sketch 2D Path.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model.

click Profile 1. The only way to align these elements is visually.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. as shown. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. 11 On the Options Bar. Using Swept Blends | 613 . click (Rectangle). and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. and click Edit. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. click Finish Path. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. 10 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 6 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. click (Default 3D View). 8 On the Design Bar.

and press ESC.13 On the Tools toolbar. click Profile 2. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Profile. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Using the same method. and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. click (Align).) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc.

and click . click Swept Blend Properties. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click <By Category>. click Finish Profile. under Materials and Finishes.18 On the Design Bar. select Mass (Transparent). Using Swept Blends | 615 . 23 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Materials dialog. click Finish Swept Blend. 22 Click OK twice.

Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. You then load that mass family file and others into a project.24 On the Design Bar. Finally. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. you create new family types from a mass family file. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements.rvt. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Finish Mass. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. In this exercise.

Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. for Depth. 4 In the Family Types dialog. for Depth. for Height. under Other. enter 6000 mm. and click OK. 8 For Width. and click OK.rfa. 6 For Width. and for Name. enter 12000 mm. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. click Training Files. enter 15000mm. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. 7 Click New. and click Apply. for Height.rfa. enter 46000mm. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. for Depth. 5 Click New. click New. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. and click Apply. for Width.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Height. 3 In the Name dialog. enter 18000 mm. In this exercise. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . and click OK. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. enter 11000 mm. and click Apply. 2 In the Family Types dialog. 9 Click OK. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. and for Name. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. enter 9000 mm. click Family Types. enter 68000 mm. enter 18000 mm.

TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. 8 In the Type Selector. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family.rfa. and Triangle. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. click Training Files. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm.rfa. Arc Dome. click Place Mass. 6 Open the Box-Training. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also load other existing mass families and place them. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 1 If not already selected. 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.rfa. on the View toolbar.rvt.rfa family files. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. double-click Site. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. as shown. under Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. Semi Barrel Vault. under Views (all). 3 On the View Control Bar.

14 In the Type Selector. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. and click OK twice. 23 On the Options Bar. 17 Press CTRL. 20 In the Type Selector. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. and click (Element Properties). and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. specify Mass (Opaque). click Modify. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. select the triangle. and click to place the mass. click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 24 On the Design Bar. select the 3 boxes. as shown. click (Element Properties). 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. enter 90 for Angle. for the Material parameter. click Place Mass. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. 11 Select the box.10 On the Design Bar. for the Material parameter. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. specify Mass (Transparent). and click OK twice. 25 In the drawing area. select Rotate after placement. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. click Place Mass. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 .

30 Place the box mass family as shown.26 Select the triangle. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click (Element Properties). for the Material parameter. specify Mass (Transparent). click (Default 3D View). click Place Mass. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Selector. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties). and click OK twice. for the Material parameter. 33 On the View toolbar. specify Mass (Opaque). 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. and click OK twice. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm.

the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. click (Default 3D View). you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. In this exercise. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . NOTE When you join geometry. you join these mass elements. In the next exercise. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. (Join Geometry). You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar.rvt file. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place.

click (Mirror). double-click Site. 4 Select the triangle. under Floor Plans. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). on the Edit toolbar. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser.3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected.

Joining Mass Elements | 623 . enter SM. 17 Press ESC to see the result.8 On the Options Bar. for Axis. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. click (Default 3D View). and then select the triangle. 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. as shown. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. (Join Geometry). Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. click (Draw). 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point.

In this exercise. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson.rvt. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . you joined mass elements together. (If Design Options is already selected.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. and select the triangle mass element. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. click Modify. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. do not clear the check mark. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. 1 On the Design Bar. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. 2 On the Window menu. click (Add to Design Option Set).

Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. clear Curved. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. click Place Mass. 10 On the Options Bar. 14 In the drawing area. and click OK. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. double-click Site. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. and click OK twice. click Place Mass. click Modify. specify Mass (Transparent). enter 90. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. select Sloped (primary). 13 On the Design Bar. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. for Angle. 7 In the Type Selector. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. under Views (all). 17 In the Type Selector. and click (Element Properties). select Rotate after placement. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. for the Material parameter.

TIP To find the correct shapes. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. specify Mass (Transparent). 20 In the drawing area. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. click Modify. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. and watch the status bar. under 3D Views. and click OK twice. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . 19 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. and click (Element Properties). select Curved. 28 In the Project Browser. select the three arc domes. under Views (all). 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 23 On the View Control Bar. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. under Elevations. and click OK. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. clear Sloped. double-click North. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. under Views (all). click (Add to Design Option Set). double-click {3D}. for the Material parameter. 22 In the Project Browser. While pressing CTRL.

32 On the Design Options toolbar. click (Design Options). 34 Close the warning that displays. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. click the Design Options tab. and click OK. 33 In the Design Options dialog. select Curved from the Design Option menu. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option.rvt. click Make Primary. you can make it the primary option. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. and click Close. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. under Option.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 35 On the File menu. you placed mass elements into Design Options. select Curved and. In this exercise. 31 Click the value for Design Option.

you pick massing faces to create walls. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. 1 In the Project Browser. select Basic Wall: Exterior .Brick on CMU. click (Pick Faces). In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model. under Views (all). Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Wall by Face. 6 On the Options Bar. double-click {3D}. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. 5 In the Type Selector. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. and for Loc Line. 2 On the View toolbar. click Training Files. select Wall Centerline.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model.rvt.

12 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). click Wall by Face. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. under Views (all). under Floor Plans.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. under Views (all). 15 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 5. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . under Floor Plans. 14 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Type Selector. click Wall by Face. 8 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. double-click Level 3. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 11 In the Project Browser. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. 9 On the Design Bar. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. click Wall by Face. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red.

18 Select all the faces shown in red. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Views (all). 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 9. If desired. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. click Wall by Face. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. 20 On the View Control Bar. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. 19 In the Project Browser.

4 Click OK. click Mass Floors. perimeter. 3 On the Model Categories tab. under Views (all). Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. Curtain Systems. When you select levels. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. 1 In the Project Browser. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. 6 On the Options Bar. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area.In this exercise. and exterior surface area.rvt. and click OK. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . and Walls. select all levels. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. clear Curtain Panels. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise. double-click {3D}. 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. volume.

click Modify. select Levels 1-4. 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. 10 Press CTRL. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK. click Mass Floors.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 13 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar.

Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. 15 Press CTRL. and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. click Mass Floors. 16 On the Options Bar. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model. select Level 1. and click OK.14 On the Options Bar.

add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. under Category. press and hold SHIFT. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. select Floor Area. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. Floor Perimeter. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order). 4 Using the same method. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . and select Level. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. The Floor Area. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. schedules can be created using the mass floors. Floor Volume. and click Add. under Available fields. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. and click OK.rvt. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. select Mass Floor.In this exercise.

Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. select Mass: Family and Type. and click OK. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . for Usage. for Sort by. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text. enter Retail. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule.

and click Remove. 14 Select Level. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. right-click Mass Floor Schedule. and click Move Up until Level is listed second.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. for Fields. click Move Up until Usage is listed first. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. expand Schedules/Quantities. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Other. select Mass: Family and Type. After you assign usage. and click Properties. under Scheduled fields (in order). click Edit. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 With Usage selected.

for Field formatting. and click Rename. 27 Click OK twice. 18 On the Filter tab. under Fields. and plan views. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. click Edit. for Filter by. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. select Usage. select Calculate totals. select Level. right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. elevation. in the field under Filter by. 22 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Rename View dialog. under Other. and click OK. click Edit. and select Grand totals. for Filter. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. select Usage. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. select Floor Area. for Sort by. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 19 Click OK twice. under Other. 16 On the Formatting tab. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. for Filter. 20 Click in the title of the schedule. and click OK. and in the field below. for Then by. 24 In the Project Browser. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. enter Hotel.

you created mass floor schedules. double-click {3D}. floor perimeter. click Roof by Face. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. under Views (all).rvt. The mass floor schedules list. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . you pick massing faces to create roofs. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model. the floor area. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser.In this exercise. by level.

click Create Roof. Your model should now look as shown. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. click Create Roof. select Basic Roof : Generic .4 In the Type Selector. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 5 On the Options Bar.400mm. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 .

you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 13 Using the same method. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. and click OK. 12 On the Options Bar.8 Using the method you just learned. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. select Curtain Panels. click Create Roof. In this exercise. Curtain Systems. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. in the Type Selector. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. 10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. and Walls. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . select Sloped Glazing.

4 On the Options Bar. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. double-click {3D}. verify that Select Multiple is selected.rvt. 5 Press CTRL. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 3 In the Type Selector. click Create System. under Views (all). 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain System by Face. 6 On the Options Bar.

select the blended form on the in-place mass.7 Using the same method. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing . 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes.

9 On the Options Bar. 11 Using the same method. click Create System. create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.

and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing . you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. you change the size of an existing mass family.rvt. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.12 Click Modify to exit the command.

8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. under Floor Plans. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . and Walls. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. 6 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. Roofs. clear Exclude Design Options. Next. Floors. clear Curtain Panels. 7 On the Options Bar. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements.1 In the Project Browser. for Width. Curtain Systems. 2 On the View menu. 3 On the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). and click OK. click Modify. enter 30000. and then click OK. and click (Element Properties). 4 Select the box mass family as shown.

646 | Chapter 17 Massing . The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Floor Plans. 12 On the View Control Bar. double-click Level 1. In the next steps. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. under Views (all). 13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown.10 Open the 3D view to see the result. 11 In the Project Browser.

15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. click (Default 3D View). click Remake. you want to select the smaller one. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . click OK. 16 On the View toolbar.TIP To select the curtain wall. 17 Select the roof as shown. 14 On the Options Bar. Also.

click Remake. and click Remake. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing . 19 Select the arc dome curtain system.18 On the Options Bar.

1 Open the 3D view.rvt.20 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . under Schedules/Quantities. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. In this exercise. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. you changed the size of an existing mass family. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements.

7 Clear one of the check boxes. under 3D Views. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 6 On the Model Categories tab. 4 Rename the view 3D . Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing.Massing only. 9 Select Mass. click All to select all categories. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . right-click {3D}.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Project Browser.

you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. If desired. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. such as columns and an extruded roof. This concludes the massing tutorial. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 .In this exercise. You might create the model shown. to the building shell.

652 .

You mirror one instance of the group. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. place. When you make changes to a nested group. you add the new model group to a previously created group. hotel rooms. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Creating. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. 653 . Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. all instances in the building model are updated. and typical office layouts. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. you also simplify the modification process. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. or with those working on a different project. In another exercise. For example. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. Modifying. The new group is considered nested within the host group. In this exercise. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. the host group is also updated automatically. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and modify repetitive units. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you not only simplify their placement. In this tutorial. After you create a model group. You can also nest groups within other groups. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. By grouping objects.

click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.rvt. 2 Click in the drawing area. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click First Floor. expand Floor Plans. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . enter ZR. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. expand Views (all).

3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. 4 On the Edit toolbar. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. enter Typical Kitchen. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. click (Group). and click OK.

Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. 656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . select the center control for the group origin. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

expand Model. and click Create Instance. under Groups. click Modify. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. 12 On the Design Bar. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. right-click Typical Kitchen.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed.

click (Mirror). clear Copy. NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image.14 On the Edit toolbar. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping . The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan.

19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. and on the Edit toolbar.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. Creating and Placing a Group | 659 . 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. click (Rotate).

one mirrored.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. and one rotated. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping . as shown.

Save the training file 22 On the File menu. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Save As. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. Modifying a Group In this exercise. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. press TAB to highlight the wall. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. and click to select it. Modifying a Group | 661 . m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click Save. When you finish editing. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory.rvt. you make changes to an instance of a group.

Click icon to exclude in this group instance. 8 On the Design Bar.).). 4 Move the cursor over the door. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping . This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. NOTE To display an excluded element. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.). press TAB. and click to select the wall. and click to select the door. 7 Click (Group Member. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. click Modify. press TAB.3 Click (Group Member. (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member.). select the element. and click member to group instance. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall.

11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. click Wall. Modifying a Group | 663 . 13 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Selector. 14 In the Type Selector. 15 On the Options Bar. clear Tag on Placement. move the cursor to the left. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet.127mm. 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Door.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. select Basic Wall : Generic .

17 On the Design Bar. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. click Edit Group. click Modify. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. move the cursor up. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. In edit group mode. 23 In the drawing area. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 21 On the Options Bar. All other elements in the model are grayed out. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Nesting Groups | 665 . enter 2134. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click 28 For Base Offset. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. click Finish. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. Nesting Groups In this exercise.25 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 29 On the group editor toolbar. and on the Options Bar. which acts as the host. enter 1000. created in an earlier lesson. for Unconnected Height. 26 Select the opening. under Constraints. and click OK. you add the Typical Kitchen group. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. (Element Properties).

Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. click (Add to Group). double-click First Floor. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. 4 On the group editor toolbar. in the Project Browser. select the Typical Kitchen group. 3 On the Options Bar. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 5 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans.rvt. click Edit Group.

6 Press TAB. Nesting Groups | 667 . double-click Second Floor. and each of the bifold doors. select the wall between the folding doors. 8 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Finish. 7 On the group editor toolbar. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group.

and create an attached detail group containing the tags. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. you add door tags to a group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . such as text. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. under Floor Plans. In the next exercise. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. such as door and window tags. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. and filled regions.10 Click File menu ➤ Save. double-click First Floor. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model.rvt.

click Filled Region. 4 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. and select a point below the left elevator. click to draw a rectangular region. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 669 .

15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. click to add an arc leader. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 12 Enter Tile. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. and select the text note and the filled region. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. click Text.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. and on the Design Bar. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 14 On the Edit toolbar. and click OK. click Modify. as shown. click (Group). 16 In the drawing area. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL.

20 In the Project Browser. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Create Instance. 21 In the drawing area. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Because the detail group contains variables. double-click Second Floor. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. under Floor Plans.18 On the Design Bar. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. under Groups. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . 22 On the Design Bar. expand Detail. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

clear Leader. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. 3 On the Options Bar. double-click First Floor. click Modify. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser.manner that a drawing component can be added. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Tag ➤ By Category. 5 On the Design Bar.rvt. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. as shown. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.

Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. click (Group). and click OK. double-click Second Floor. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . 8 In the Filter dialog. click (Filter Selection). and click OK. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. select Door Tags. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. for Attached Detail Group Name.7 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. 11 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Edit toolbar. click Check None. under Floor Plans.

Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. you can then work with it in the context of the new project.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. When you load the group from the library into a new project. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Modify. click Place Detail. 14 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. and click OK. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. therefore.

right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. browse to the Desktop. click Modify.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. and click Create Instance. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . for Create new. under Groups\Model. expand Groups. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click Save Group. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. and click Open. and expand Model. select 2 Bedroom Unit. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. click OK. verify that Project is selected. accept the default template file.rvt. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. verify that Same as group name is selected. and click OK. click Desktop. In this case. A warning dialog displays. 3 For File name. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser.rvt. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and click Save. 5 In the New Project dialog. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project.

This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. expand Revit Links. click Use Existing.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. and the link is removed. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. click Modify. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. 23 In the confirmation dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file.rvt. 17 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. and click OK. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. click OK. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Attached Details is selected only. select the linked Revit model. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. click Training Files. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click Remove Link. 24 In the message dialog. When a group is converted to a link. click Bind.rvt file is added as a link to the project. click Link. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. and on the Options Bar. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog.

you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. and then modify the data. In the final exercises. You add property lines manually. islands. you add a building pad to the site. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. and walkways. Using Site Tools In this lesson. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project.Site 19 In this tutorial. 677 . convert the data to a table.

and double-click Site. right-click in the Design Bar. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. click Point. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_First_Project. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. and click Site. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . expand Views (all). This project file was created using the default metric template. you create a toposurface using two different methods. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. click Training Files.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Using the first method. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. In the second part of this exercise. click Toposurface. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. expand Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. 3 On the Design Bar.

The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Use the following illustration as a reference.

13 In the Site Settings dialog. click Finish Surface. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. and click OK. 15000mm. under Increment. enter 1500mm. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. and 18000mm absolute elevations. Use the following illustration as a reference. under Additional Contours.8 On the Options Bar. 12000mm. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. click Site Settings. 12 On the Settings menu. 11 On the Design Bar. 680 | Chapter 19 Site .

under Views (all). click Modify. 14 On the View toolbar.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . 16 On the View toolbar. click to delete it. enter 1000mm. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). modify the level names and elevations. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. Before importing the contour data. on the Standard toolbar. click the elevation value. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and press ENTER. 18 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). 15 On the View Control Bar. and double-click South. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. (SteeringWheels). click to view it at various angles.

double-click Site. Click Open. 29 Select the imported topography. and click OK. click Yes. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. click Pin Position. For Layers. rename the level Basement. under Views (all). and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. 28 On the Design Bar.21 Click the Level 2 text. 23 Click the Level 1 text. under Floor Plans. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . click Training Files. 24 In the Project Browser. select Specify. it is considered an import symbol. and press ENTER. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. click Modify. select Preserve. Until it is exploded. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. For Colors. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 30 On the Edit menu. rename the level Base Site Elevation. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. and press ENTER. Verify that Current view only is not selected. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats.

you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. When you select the import symbol. 34 Under Visibility. click the Annotation Categories tab. select it. 32 On the View menu. when the edges highlight.31 On the Design Bar. click Toposurface. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. 36 On the Design Bar. clear C_INDX. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and then click OK. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. clear Elevations. click Modify. and click OK.

684 | Chapter 19 Site . 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. click (SteeringWheels). you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. 40 On the View toolbar. Using the first method. click Finish Surface. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. and click Save. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. 42 On the View toolbar. Using the second method. name the project Site-in progress. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings.rvt. 45 Proceed to the next exercise.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. Adding Property Lines on page 684. click (Default 3D View). Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 39 On the Design Bar. this project file is required in its current state. you add property lines using two methods.

and click OK. double-click Site. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. Select and delete the right vertical line. 4 On the Design Bar. Adding Property Lines | 685 .This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. If you have not completed the previous exercise. click Property Line. Site-in progress. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. On the Design Bar. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog.rvt. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. select Create property lines by sketching. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. do so before continuing. click Lines. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. Click Modify.

to delete them. click Finish Sketch. 9 In the warning dialog. 8 On the Options Bar. click Property Line. on the Standard toolbar. and click OK. click 12 On the Design Bar. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . click OK. click OK.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. select the lines. when they highlight. select Edit Table. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. 6 On the Design Bar. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. A warning dialog is displayed. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. add an arc line on the right. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography.

14 In the Property Lines dialog. If the gap is not closed. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. Adding Property Lines | 687 . 16 Click OK. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. 19 In the Tags dialog. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 15 Starting in Row #1. click to place the property lines. This means there is no gap in the property lines. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments.

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689.20 Click Load. Before adding property line segment tags. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. In the next exercise. 27 On the Options Bar. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. this project file is required in its current state. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 30 On the View Control Bar. and click Drafting. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. In this exercise. right-click in the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. 22 In the Tags dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save.rfa. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. you created two sets of property lines. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. The tags display more prominently in this view. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. 25 Under Visibility.dwg and click OK. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. In the final step. click the Imported Categories tab. and click OK. 23 On the View menu. click to place it. click Tag ➤ By Category. clear Leader.

Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. In the Object Styles dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 7 Click OK. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. select Single Value. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. and click OK. select Topography. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . 2 On the Settings menu.0mm. click Object Styles. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. enter 1000. under Contour Line Display.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. enter the name Working Contour. Under Line Color. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. select Working Contour. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. for Subcategory. click New.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Site-in progress. select Dash dot. Under Range Type. select a shade of Brown. 10 Under Additional Contours. click Site Settings. Under Subcategory. Under Line Pattern. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. 6 In the Object Styles dialog.

The object style subcategory. and islands. and islands. Working Contour. you create topographic subregions to define roads. parking areas. The next exercise requires a new training file.11 Click OK. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. such as material. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. In this exercise. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. In the next exercise. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. you create subregions in order to define roads. Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . parking areas.

click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Subregion. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 .rvt. 2 On the Design Bar. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. and open Metric\m_Site. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. Although the exact dimensions are not important. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. try to replicate the location and proportion. click Lines. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide.

and click to open the Materials dialog. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . and click OK. select Site . Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography.Tarmacadam for Name. click the value for Material. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. click Properties. enter Parking for Name. 6 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. When you finish the sketch in a later step. and click OK.NOTE In the Metric training file. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. under Identity Data. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar.

they display within this schedule. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. under Floor Plans.9 On the View Control Bar. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. As you create new subregions. double-click Site. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. 14 On the Options Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . click Edit Boundary. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration.Tarmacadam. 12 On the View Control Bar. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. and double-click Topography Schedule.

TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. 20 On the View Control Bar. click Subregion. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. Within each subregion. 22 On the Design Bar. click Lines. double-click Topography Schedule. Delete overlapping lines. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. under Floor Plans. In this training project. 18 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. click Finish Sketch. 16 On the Design Bar. Notice that the project area has increased. 17 On the View Control Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

23 In the upper-right parking area. 24 On the Design Bar. and click to open the Materials dialog. click Properties. and click OK. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. 29 On the View Control Bar. 28 On the Design Bar.Grass for Name. 26 In the Materials dialog. 25 In the Element Properties dialog.Grass for Name. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Topography Schedule. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. and click OK. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. enter Island . under Materials and Finishes. 30 In the Project Browser. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. click the value for Material. under Identity Data. Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . under Schedules/Quantities. select Site . click Finish Sketch.

double-click Site. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. double-click Topography Schedule. 35 On the Design Bar. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . 32 In the Project Browser. and apply the material Site . click Lines. under Floor Plans. under Schedules/Quantities. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration.Grass. Name the subregion Walkway. click Subregion. Notice that the schedule has been updated. 696 | Chapter 19 Site .31 In the Project Browser.walkway. under Floor Plans. 34 On the Design Bar. You must sketch each region separately. Name each region Island Grass. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. double-click Site. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser.

so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. double-click Topography Schedule. there is still only one toposurface. 37 On the Design Bar. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. 38 In the Project Browser. Notice that the schedule has been updated. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. click Finish Sketch. under Schedules/Quantities.

this project file is required in its current state. double-click Site. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. and click Save. 41 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. under Floor Plans. When you use the grading tool.rvt. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . Site tutorial-in progress. 2 Select the toposurface. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As.

6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Existing for Phase Created. 5 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. and click OK. select Copy Internal Points. see the tutorial. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. click (Element Properties). click Graded Region. A warning dialog is displayed. under Phasing. and click Select and Edit. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Select the topographic surface. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . Using Phasing on page 761.3 On the Options Bar.

Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. 10 Press DELETE. 700 | Chapter 19 Site .Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration.

Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. 11 On the View Control Bar. demolished. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Grading the Toposurface | 701 . and new. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.

Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 15 On the Options Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Surface. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Point. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. 18 On the View toolbar. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. 17 On the Design Bar. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . click (Default 3D View).13 Press DELETE. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar.

nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. click View Properties.20 On the View toolbar. When you add a building pad. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. this project file is required in its current state. under Phasing. click View Properties. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. under Phasing. and click OK. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. only the original toposurface displays. Only the graded topography displays. click to view it at various angles. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. (SteeringWheels). because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. you can delete it. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. and click OK. 23 Select the toposurface. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. specify New Construction for Phase. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. specify Existing for Phase. Therefore. you create a building pad. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. 24 On the View menu. and delete it.

NOTE By default.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Lines. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.rvt. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . click Finish Sketch. the Pick Walls command is active. under Floor Plans. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. 6 On the Design Bar. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. Site tutorial-in progress. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. If you have an existing building model. 4 On the Design Bar. 2 On the View Control Bar. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. click Pad. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar.

TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. 8 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Adding Site Components on page 706. 7 On the View Control Bar. click (Default 3D View). NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. Notice the new building pad. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. 9 On the View toolbar. For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . click (SteeringWheels). 11 Proceed to the next exercise.

rvt. click Modify. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. click Parking Component. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 706 | Chapter 19 Site .90 deg. 5 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. and select the parking space. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.Adding Site Components In this exercise. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. 3 In the Type Selector. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. Site tutorial-in progress. under Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space.NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. click (Default 3D View). TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. 8 On the View toolbar. Adding Site Components | 707 .

under Floor Plans. double-click Site.9 On the View toolbar. choose any tree type. click (SteeringWheels). and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. Notice the new parking spaces. click Site Component. 708 | Chapter 19 Site . 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Selector.

15 On the View toolbar. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 On the View toolbar. click (SteeringWheels). Adding Site Components | 709 .13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. click (Default 3D View). In the following illustration. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. double-click Site. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 710 | Chapter 19 Site . and click OK. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. Site tutorial-in progress. under Floor Plans. click Tag All Not Tagged. and click Apply. click Hidden Line.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. 5 On the View menu. click Apply. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. this project file is required in its current state. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

to position the shoulder of the leader. 8 On the Options Bar. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. Click again to the left to position the leader.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. Click up and to the left. as shown: 10 Using the same method. outside of the site. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. In the following exercise. You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected.

■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. 12 Press and hold CTRL. and select the 3 spot dimensions. 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 712 | Chapter 19 Site .

Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. you create a parking schedule.■ Clear Leader. 14 On the Design Bar. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Modify. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. this project file is required in its current state.

9 On the Window menu. 7 Under Fields. under Floor Plans. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Type. and click Add. 4 Under Available fields. and click Add. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. and under Heading. click Tile. The parking schedule is displayed. select Parking for Category. 11 On the Window menu. under Space. If necessary. select Type. enter Size. select Mark.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click Schedule/Quantities. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. under Views (all). 2 In the New Schedule dialog. click the Fields tab. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 8 Under Fields. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. 12 In the Site plan. 6 Click the Formatting tab. Site tutorial-in progress. 10 In the Project Browser. and click OK.rvt. enter Space. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. and click OK. and under Heading. number the first three spaces consecutively. 13 In the Parking Schedule. click Close Hidden Windows. 5 Under Available fields. select Mark. 714 | Chapter 19 Site . double-click Site.

14 In the Parking Schedule. finish numbering the remaining spaces. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . under Space.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule.

716 .

you must first enable Worksharing. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. Working in a shared project In a shared project. stairs. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. Using Worksharing. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. and so on. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. To make a workset editable. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. select the desired workset. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. The first time you activate worksets within a project. floors. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. Elements specific to a view. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. doors. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. however. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. In this tutorial. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. such as walls. use Element Borrowing. such as annotations and dimensions. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . you specify an active workset. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. called Worksharing. you can select which worksets are open or closed. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. When you are working on a shared project. You can enable Worksharing for any project. and click Editable. A workset is a collection of building elements. they cannot make changes to it. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. go to the Worksets dialog. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. All other team members can view this workset. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. After the project is shared.

you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. In a multi-story structure. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. and View worksets. In the lessons and exercises that follow. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. Instead. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. Shared Levels and Grids. such as a tenant interior. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. You should have at least one workset for each person. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. not including the Project Standards. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets.dialog. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. Experience has shown that. In the next exercise. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. After learning the fundamentals. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. for a typical project. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. In most projects. When setting up Worksharing.

This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. if a workset named Interior was created. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. each team member has control over a portion of the design. When creating the new worksets. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. On this tab. When you create a new workset. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. with each assigned a specific functional task. As new members create worksets for their own use. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be.Team member roles Typically. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. For example. designers work in teams. Regardless of the default setting.

it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. you can select which workset is active. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. This is called “Selective Open. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. This makes them available to other team members. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. the file is saved as the central file. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. As you work. proceeds as usual. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. your changes are saved. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. you should then save to your local file. Therefore. within the local file. On the Options Bar.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. you make that workset editable by you. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. When finished or at regular intervals.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. however. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. your changes propagate to the entire team. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. Generally. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. When you save to the central file. However. When you save locally (to your local file). Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. After saving to the central file. When you save to the central file.

WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. reload the latest changes from the central file. if you know who checked out the required workset. you should check out the Materials workset. you work no differently then you would in the office. Alternatively. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. make any required worksets editable. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. for instance.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. In this instance. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. using VPN. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. In the next exercise. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. save to the central file. In this conceptual exercise. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. In this situation. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. When working remotely. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. and make that workset editable. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. To do this. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. and then save the local file. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings.

click Training Files. When you enable worksharing.rvt. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects .Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. and notice all are editable by you. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Show. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. 3 In the Worksets dialog. Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. click Worksets. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Your username displays as the present owner. and open Common\c_Worksets. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. The Worksets dialog displays. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so.

In this training file. 11 In the Worksets dialog. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. imagine four users including yourself. For example. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. Project Standards. and double-click Level 1. 8 Click OK. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. a small number of team members are working on the building model. however. When you initially activate Worksharing. expand Floor Plans. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". type the name Exterior Shell. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. select Workset1. another is assigned the interior layout. and Views. Therefore. 14 In the Worksets dialog. 16 In the drawing area. 13 In the Rename dialog. clear Families. currently named Workset1. You do. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. 12 Click Rename. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. In this case. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. clear Visible by default in all views. you can rename the default workset. and click OK. click . Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. under Identity Data. Only User-Created worksets should display. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. In this simple training project. click OK. Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. 9 Click New.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. For training purposes. Because the interior walls appear in many views. ■ 5 Under Show. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . it is better to make them visible by default. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout. 17 On the Options Bar. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. expand Views (all). click New. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model.

27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Worksets tab. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. click . 20 Select one of the interior walls. stairs. and walls. under Identity Data. under Identity Data. 23 Select all of the interior elements. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 Click OK. select Interior Layout for Workset. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 24 On the Options Bar. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. and click OK. 21 On the Options Bar. and click OK. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset.19 Click OK. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. 26 On the View menu. including the interior doors. click . select Interior Layout for Workset.

43 Click OK. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. 42 On the right side of the dialog. click . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . 32 Select Interior Layout. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. 41 In the Worksets dialog. click the Worksets tab. 39 Click Save.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. under Floor Plans. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. 30 On the View menu. double-click Level 2. you enabled Worksharing on a project. If any interior elements remain. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. 44 On the File menu. In this exercise. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. Now that you have created the central file. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. click Non Editable. and click OK. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. select all of the interior elements of the building model. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. click Close. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. make sure you remember the location of this central file. 35 On the Options Bar. click Worksets. 34 In the drawing area. 38 In the Save As dialog. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. select Interior Layout for Workset. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. click Visibility/Graphics. under Identity Data. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all). click Save As. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. and click OK. 33 In the Project Browser.

The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. click Worksets. 11 In the Worksets dialog. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. expand Views (all). Before working on the model. 15 In the Project Browser.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. click Save As. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. make modifications to the building model. 6 On the File menu. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. select the central file. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. check out worksets. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. please do so before continuing. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. click Open. 4 Click Open. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. and click OK. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 8 In the File Save Options dialog. you create your local file. select Interior Layout. and click Save. 13 On the Window menu. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. select all the User-Created worksets. and double-click Level 1. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and select Specify. In addition. and select Yes for Editable. Next. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. select Interior Layout for Name. In this case. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 7 In the Save As dialog. You have created a local file which is for your use only. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. 2 In the Open dialog. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and click OK. 12 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. click Options. If you have not yet completed the exercise.

Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. notice the Editable Only option. On the Options Bar. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . and click OK. 22 Click OK. you can still edit this wall. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Worksets. If it was owned by another user. 18 On the Options Bar. 23 On the File menu. click . a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. under Identity Data. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 On the Options Bar. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. however. Verify that it is cleared. In this case. If this is selected. click . but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. Because this element is not owned by another user. 20 Under Constraints. In the Worksets dialog. 24 Click OK.

The precise location is not important. click Wall. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 34 In the Type Selector. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. click Door. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 29 In the Type Selector. 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. select Basic Wall: Interior . 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 31 On the Design Bar. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Modify. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 26 Delete the door. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner.126mm Partition (2-hr).

displays the workset as well as the element type. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. add two door openings into the rooms you created. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. You modified the building model. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. By default. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. In this exercise. it is recommended. For training purposes. make elements editable. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. you should perform regular saves. Borrowed Elements is selected. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. In addition. and save locally immediately afterward. leave this file open in its current state. If you have not yet completed these exercises. please do so before continuing. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . save to central. Whenever you save. click Save to Central. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. and reload the latest changes. When working in your local file. In this particular case. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. At the end of a work session. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. which matches the information in the Status Bar. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. you created your local file. you should relinquish all worksets. a tooltip. checked out worksets. two users access the central file through a network connection. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. Throughout the process. each user must check out worksets.

16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 9 Click Open. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. and click OK. one user has already created a local file. and proceed to Creating a local copy. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. click Worksets. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. enter User 2. and select Yes for Editable. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. 12 In the Save As dialog. click Open. 4 Click the General Tab and. specifically sequenced. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. User 2: Create a local file. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. click Options.rvt. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. select the central file. 7 In the Open dialog. select all the User-Created worksets. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. 11 On the File menu. In the following section of this exercise. This file is for your use only. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. and reset the Username to your computer login name. and click OK. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. You now have a local copy of the project. instructions are staggered. 15 On the File menu. and click OK. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. click Save As. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. 3 On the Settings menu. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. In addition. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. under Username. return to the Settings dialog. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. skip the following section. and select Specify. consider that person to be User 1. and click Save. This is a system setting. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Regardless of which central file you choose to use. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. For training purposes. click Options. 14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network.

select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. open it now. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. User 1: Check out worksets. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning.You are now the owner of that workset. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). click Worksets. modify the building model. 17 Click OK. 24 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. expand Floor Plans. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. expand Views (all). Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. 23 Click OK. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. If you only have one workset checked out.” 29 Click OK. and double-click Level 1. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. click Save to Central. select the lower exterior wall. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. 27 On the File menu. and select Yes for Editable. it becomes the active workset. 19 On the File menu. 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. and double-click Level 1. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. If it is not open.

32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. 33 On the File menu. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active.” 39 Click OK. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. under Floor Plans. User 1: Reload latest worksets. 41 On the File menu. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. under Views (all). 44 In the Project Browser. 42 Select Furniture Layout. select Yes for Editable. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 46 In the Project Browser. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. and click OK. you should create a furniture plan view. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. and click OK. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. 37 On the File menu. When you save to central. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. click Save to Central. However. click Save to Central.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click Reload Latest. 45 In the Rename View dialog. click Worksets. right-click Copy of Level 1. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. 43 In the Project Browser. 38 In the Save to Central dialog. Click Yes.” 35 Click OK. Before adding any furniture. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. under Floor Plans. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. The changes User 2 made are apparent. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1.

61 Click OK 2 times. the Visible by default option was not selected. and click Element Properties. such as Wall Types. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. under Show. click Reload Latest. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. 60 In the Rename dialog. click Worksets. select Project Standards. choose any desk. enter Exterior Wall . rather than Families.200mm. 49 On the Design Bar. 66 On the File menu. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. are placed under Project Standards. click Component. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Worksets tab. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu. and click OK.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.” 55 Click OK. 65 Click OK. and click inside any room. 53 On the File menu. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. click Edit/New. Therefore. 62 On the File menu. 48 In the Type Selector. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. 50 On the View menu. NOTE System families. click Save to Central. click Rename. 63 In the Worksets dialog. click Save to Central. and click OK.

two users are working on the same project with separate local files. At the appropriate point in this exercise. Each user checked out worksets. leave this file open in its current state. 70 On the File menu. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. In the left pane of the Open dialog.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. This exercise requires two users and. 3 In the Save As dialog. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. and published their changes back to the central file. and these problems are rectified. There are specific instructions for each user. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. As each of you work. throughout this training. and still have your local files open.rvt. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. you save the training file as a central file. and click OK. modified the building model. click Options. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. Checking out worksets. select Save to Central. finished the previous workset exercises. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you need to set up your central and local files. leave this file open in its current state. User 1: Reload latest. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. and save 69 On the File menu. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). 734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. select the following. In subsequent steps. In the final exercise of this tutorial. click Save As. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. click Training Files. select Reload Latest. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. Each user must have network access to the central file. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734.

any referenced workset is opened but hidden. select Make this a Central File after save.4 In the File Save Options dialog. The central file should still be open. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 6 On the File menu. click Options. 15 Click Open. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. click Save As. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. click Save As. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. This is a system setting. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. Next. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and click OK. and click OK. 8 In the Save As dialog. In addition. You have created a local file which is for your use only. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 12 On the File menu. 5 Click Save. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. return to the Settings dialog. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. click Options. click Open. and click OK. 9 In the File Save Options dialog. Set the Username to User 2. and click Save. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. This is the local file for User 1. and click OK. click Options. 17 On the File menu. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 18 In the Save As dialog. On the Settings menu. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. and click OK. select the central file. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. and reset the Username to your computer login name. and click Save. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . and select Specify. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. 13 In the Open dialog. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work.

click Worksets. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. and click Open. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. and then click OK. and select Yes for Editable. and click Editing Requests. 26 In the Worksets dialog. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. 30 On the left exterior wall. if any User-Created worksets are not open. double-click Level 1. select them. 24 Under Active Workset. click Worksets. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. After you submit the request. under Floor Plans. and then click OK. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. verify that Editable Only is cleared. select Exterior Shell. 29 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Worksets dialog. At this point. select the second window from the top.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. You are now the owner of that workset. Afterwards. 27 Under Active Workset. select Interior Layout. and select Yes for Editable. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. select the Interior Layout workset. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click the File menu. You are now the owner of that workset. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission.

40 In the Save to Central dialog. select Save to Central. and notice the window is in the new location. 38 Click OK. 35 Click Grant. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. 36 Click Close. select the request submitted by User 2. click Close. you requested permission to edit the element. In this case. and click OK. and close 39 On the File menu.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. click Check Now. A message informs you that your request has been granted. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. to Local. select the following. and the other user granted it. In this multi-user exercise.

738 .

you can have multiple sets of design options. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. and each option set can have multiple schemes. 739 . you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. After you and the client agree on the final design. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. At any time in the design process.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). Using design options. In addition. For example. In this tutorial. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. The client has asked you to create various options. In this particular case.

Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. the roof and structure systems must work together. With the second option. each is constructed for interchangeability. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. and click Close. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. therefore. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. the only available command is to create a new option set. under Option Set. TIP In this exercise. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). and delete the unwanted options from the project. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. In the final exercise of this lesson. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. click Edit Selected. In the second exercise.rvt. you design each of the structural options. click New. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you set up multiple design option sets.In the first exercise in this lesson. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . you can edit it. After you create a design option. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. make your final design decision. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. 2 In the Design Options dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. each with multiple design options. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered.

4 In the Project Browser. add three columns. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. 11 On the Edit toolbar. and the third column centered between the two. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. TIP To center the middle column. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. click 12 On the Options Bar. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. expand Floor Plans. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. select: ■ ■ ■ . Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. click Modify. or add a dimension string between the columns. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. By selecting Multiple. click Column. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. expand Views (all). You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. 7 In the Type Selector. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. 9 On the Design Bar. In the following illustration. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the View menu. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. In this case. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 .

A copy of the three selected columns is added. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. using the same technique. 18 On the View toolbar. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. When you are finished.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 17 Zoom out and. they are difficult to see in this view. click . Because of the size of the columns. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .

Next. The second click specifies the end of the beam.Notice the 12 columns that you added. you add the beams that span the columns. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. The first click specifies the beam start point. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 23 On the Design Bar. In it. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click TOP OF CORE. Use the following illustration as a guide. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. under Floor Plans. Adding a beam is a two-click process. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. Zoom in on the upper right column. and click at its center to set the beam start point. click Modify. 21 In the Type Selector. select Round Bar : 50mm. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . click Beam. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column.

30 On the View toolbar. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch.25 On the Edit toolbar. move down to the next set of columns. click . This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. click 26 On the Options Bar. select: ■ ■ ■ . and click the center point. zoom into the left column. 28 Zoom out. and select the center of the column to add a copy. 744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .

42 Select Option Set 1 and. 43 In the Rename dialog. click Rename.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. under Option Set. 33 Click Finish Editing. click Rename. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. 45 Under Roofing. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. click Rename. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. under Option. and click OK. under Option. click Rename. enter Roofing for New. 32 In the Design Options dialog. enter Structure for New. 38 In the Rename dialog. 40 In the Rename dialog. enter Beam for New. 37 Select Option 2 and. and click OK. and click OK. enter Brackets for New. click New. under Option. select Option 1 (primary). and click OK. and click OK. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. There should now be two roofing design options. click Rename. 34 In the Design Options dialog. 46 Under Option. not a new option set. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 41 Under Option Set. click New. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. under Option. under Option Set. 36 In the Rename dialog. click New. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . name the option Louvers. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option.

it will resemble the following illustration. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. under Floor Plans. you create the second design option. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. select Option 2.47 Under Roofing. 52 Click Close. 51 Under Edit. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. When finished. name the option Sunscreen. This allows you to more easily manage the project. Under Now Editing. click Rename. and click OK. 53 In the Project Browser. 48 Under Option. under Structure. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. 50 In the Design Options dialog. select Edit Selected. double-click ROOF TERRACE. select Beam.

click Align. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Component. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . Refer to the following illustration. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. 56 In the Type Selector. select M_Roof Beam. The second click represents the plane that is moved. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 58 On the Tools menu.

Click to indicate the end point of the move. on the Edit toolbar. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The second click represents the move end point. The first click sets the move start point. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown.60 After aligning the beam. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Modify. 62 Select the beam and. 61 On the Design Bar. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks.

66 On the View toolbar. 69 Click Close. and click Save. you need this file in its current state. 67 On the Tools menu. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 68 In the Design Options dialog. m_Urban_House-in progress.rvt. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. which is visible by default. click Finish Editing. name the file. click Save As. click . the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created.Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. Notice that even before you close the dialog. 70 On the File menu. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . 71 Navigate to your preferred directory.

is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. do so now. you design each of the roofing options. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. 8 In the Type Selector. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 6 In the Project Browser. the other for beams. The first option. and double-click TOP OF CORE. click Component.In this exercise. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. each with multiple design options to pick from. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. delete them after the rafter is in place. Sunscreen. If you need to add dimensions. you set up multiple design option sets. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. 2 On the Tools menu. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. The second roofing system. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. open it now. expand Floor Plans. 4 Under Edit. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. 3 In the Design Options dialog. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. a Louver system. Under Now Editing. click Edit Selected. select Louvers (primary). under Roofing. With the second option. 5 Click Close. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. 10 Referring to the following illustration. expand Views (all). is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. In the next exercise. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .rvt.

click Array. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. 13 On the Options Bar. under Other. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Select 2nd for Move To. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . click Modify. Select Constrain. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click . and click OK. Enter 5 for Number. enter 11750 mm for Length. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. 16 On the Options Bar.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Edit menu.

and press ENTER. enter 990. when the listening dimension displays.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .

enter 5475 mm for Length. 20 In the Type Selector. and select the louver you just placed. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . click Component. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. 26 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. Select 2nd for Move To. 25 With the louver still selected. 27 For the array starting point. Enter 34 for Number. click Modify.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. 23 On the Options Bar. Select Constrain. and click OK. 22 On the Design Bar. click . click the Edit menu. and click Array. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system.

28 Move the cursor vertically downward. when the listening dimension displays. and. click . 29 On the View toolbar. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. and press Enter. enter 300. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .

you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 30 On the Tools menu. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. Click OK. 37 In the Work Plane dialog. click Lines. 40 On the Options Bar. under Edit. and double-click West. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. 33 Under Editing. expand Elevations.The louver roof system is complete. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns. and then click Close. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 39 On the Design Bar. In this case. select Sunscreen. and click OK. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . 34 In the Project Browser. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. 31 In the Design Options dialog. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. under Roofing. click Edit Selected. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. click Finish Editing. Therefore. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. 36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click .

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. 48 On the Design Bar. Under Constraints. click Properties. 46 On the Tools menu. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. then you can modify it through the dimension. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. Select the right arc. Under Constraints. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. The arcs should connect. You will fix this in a later step. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. and the third point defines the arc.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. the top of the next column on the right. 43 On the Design Bar. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. click Trim/Extend. 45 Click OK. The first two points define the ends of the line. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. click Finish Sketch. 41 Select the top of the left column. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. 49 On the View toolbar. then the center arc. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. click .

51 In the Design Options dialog. do so now. and last options. under Views (all). The first option. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. 50 On the Tools menu. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. under Views (all). a Louver system. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. Managing Design Options | 757 . right-click {3D}. 52 On the File menu. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. Sunscreen. expand 3D Views. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. and click OK. In this exercise. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. click Save. 2 In the Project Browser. you designed each of the roofing options. The second roofing system. and click Rename. You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. under 3D Views. 4 In the Project Browser. tertiary. and click Duplicate. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. secondary. After exploring the combinations. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. 3 In the Rename View dialog. make it part of the building model. and then click Close. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. you select a design. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. enter Primary Option. you need this file in its current state. Managing Design Options In this exercise. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. click Finish Editing. under Edit. and delete the discarded design options.The louver roof system is complete. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial.

13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 7 On the View menu. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Visibility/Graphics. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). under 3D Views. and click Rename. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. 11 On the View menu. 9 Click OK. click the Design Options tab.5 Right-click each of the copies. double-click Secondary Option. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. double-click Primary Option. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. under Views (all). 10 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click the Design Options tab.

under 3D Views. under 3D Views. 15 On the View menu. 18 In the Project Browser.14 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. At this point. Managing Design Options | 759 . under Views (all). double-click Tertiary Option. 19 On the View menu. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. In this case. click the Design Options tab. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. double-click Last Option. click Visibility/Graphics. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. under Views (all). all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. and click OK. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. In your design options. and click OK. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design.

click Yes. This was the client choice for structural. but should be accepted as part of the building model. select Beam. 29 Select Roofing. 30 Under Option Set. and deleted the discarded design options. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. click Delete to remove the views that used options. click Close. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. 31 In the alert dialog. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The set is deleted. In this exercise. 23 In the Design Options dialog. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 26 Under Option Set. 25 Select Structure. click Save. Because the client has selected the design option. 24 Under Option. After exploring the combinations. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. click Accept Primary. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Yes. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. under Structure. click Delete. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. An alert is displayed. you selected a design. 35 On the File menu. the current primaries are no longer options.22 On the Tools menu. 33 In the Design Options dialog. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. select Make Primary. the beam option becomes part of the model. 27 In the alert dialog. since you no longer need them. double-click Primary Option. made it part of the building model. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options .

Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. In the second exercise. You create new phases. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. and then add new building model elements. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. In the second exercise. then add new walls and doors in a different location. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. complete with schedules. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules. demolish existing construction. You create new phases. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. This changes room definition and total building model area. In the lesson and exercises that follow.Project Phasing 22 In any project. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. demolish existing walls and doors. For the client. 761 .

During the demolition and renovation process. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. click (Element Properties). click Project Units. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click Cancel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Phasing. In the Element Properties dialog. and open Common\c_Phasing. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. under Phasing. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. and None is selected for Phase Demolished.rvt. and click OK. you do not need to change the project units to metric. are visible in this view. regardless of phase. This means that all building model elements. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 4 Click Cancel. click Modify. click Training Files. and double-click Level 1. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. If you wish to do so. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. define the units. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 On the Options Bar. When you create a new project. As you add new elements to the building model. go to the Settings menu. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file.

under Phasing. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. click . Phasing Your Model | 763 .Existing. Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. Because this is a phase-specific view. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. 12 On the Options Bar. clear Door Tags.Existing. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. 14 On the Design Bar. and click Rename. 11 In the Filter dialog. and click OK.Existing. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 In the Rename dialog.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. under Floor Plans. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 10 On the Options Bar. and click Rename. You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. for Phase Created. enter Level 1 . right-click Level 1 . enter Level 1 . click (Filter Selection). 18 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1. and click OK. all of the building model elements. After you create the views. TIP If this were a multi-story building. 17 Click No. and click OK. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click OK. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. Because this is a renovation project. After you release the mouse button. are highlighted in red. This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. including the door tags. 16 In the Rename dialog. right-click Copy of Level 1 . you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific.Demo. under Floor Plans. select Existing.

21 In the Project Browser. enter Composite Plan. 29 For Composite Plan. under Floor Plans. 26 In the Phasing dialog. for Phase. under New. under Floor Plans. click the Phase Filters tab. 24 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 . On a logical time line.Existing. Notice that the line pattern is still gray. 27 Click New. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. Because of this time relationship. Later in this exercise. 28 Under Filter Name. Existing. under Phasing. Phase status is time-dependent.Demo. In this case. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. and Temporary. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. new construction occurs after existing construction. however. select Overridden. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list. Next. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. select Existing. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. There are five default phase filters. Demolished. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. to which all the building model elements belong. you modify these settings. double-click Level 1 . This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. You may need to zoom in to see this. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition.

specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. 39 In the Phasing dialog. 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. There are two ways to demolish an element. under Cut ➤ Lines. 35 Click OK twice. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. 42 In the Project Browser. you demolish all elements hosted by it.Existing.31 Under Phase Status. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. Phasing Your Model | 765 . double-click Level 1 . 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. As you click each wall. 36 Using the same method. select the line style. you begin demolition. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. select the interior walls one at a time. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 . The cursor is displayed as a hammer. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. under Floor Plans. 32 In the Demolished row. Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. click the value for Color. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. its display changes to a red dashed line. or you can use the demolish tool. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements.Demo. When you demolish the host. 34 In the Color dialog. 38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. click OK. Next. select a lighter blue. select Demolished. click (Demolish). select red. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar.

45 In the Element Properties dialog. click Door. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. 53 Open Level 1 . select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". 52 Open Level 1 . for Phase Filter. click Wall. and click OK. under Phasing. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 51 Add a door leading into each room. select Show Previous + New. 50 In the Type Selector. The demolished walls no longer display. add a long horizontal wall.44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select Composite Plan for Phase Filter.Existing. for Phase Filter. select Basic Wall: Interior . under Phasing. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 49 On the Design Bar. 47 In the Type Selector. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing .4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). 55 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors.Demo. 48 Using the following illustration as a guide.

The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed.Demo. 62 If necessary. click (Default 3D View). and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 .New. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. All elements are displayed in this view. and existing shows as half-tone. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. 60 On the View toolbar.New. 61 On the View Control Bar. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. regardless of phase. right-click Level 1 . You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. which are displayed as red. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. because the phase filter is set to Show All. 57 In the Project Browser. Phasing Your Model | 767 . Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. new is shown in blue. The renovated building model plan is displayed. 59 Open Level 1 .

and locations change depending on the phase of the project. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. define the units. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. you can see the new walls added to the building model. click Training Files. 3 Open Level 1 . you can do so at this time. you do not need to change the project units to metric. demolition. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Open Level 1 . and double-click Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. As the renovation process continues. In this view. click Project Units. expand Views (all). If you wish to save this file. and new construction. You can also see that the room quantities.rvt. If you wish to do so.New. 63 Close the file. go to the Settings menu.Demo. In this exercise. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase.Existing. In this view. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise.Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. expand Floor Plans. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. and click OK. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. therefore. the rooms change in both definition and size. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. Notice that this view is the original building model. In the next exercise. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. All room boundaries are phase-specific. sizes. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases.

notice that there are two phases defined in this project.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. click Room.Existing. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . 5 Click OK. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 9 On the Design Bar. 13 Open Level 1 . yet they have different room numbers. In the Phasing dialog. click Room Tag. click Modify. 10 Open Level 1 . click Room. 11 On the Design Bar. and maximize the view. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. click in each room as you move to the right.Demo. 6 Open Level 1 . Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase. Use the following illustration as a guide. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar.New. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag.

click Close Hidden Windows. In addition. 18 Open Room Schedule . In this exercise. The two schedule views tile.Existing. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. 17 On the Window menu. expand Schedules/Quantities. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. and double-click Room Schedule . 20 Close the file. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. 16 In the Project Browser. In this case. Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. View phase-specific room schedules. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. click Tile. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. 19 On the Window menu.New Construction. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views.

In the final lesson. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. performance. 771 . This maximizes efficiency. and manage the links throughout the project. In this tutorial.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. In these situations. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. Comparison of alternatives on a site. you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. modify their visibility. You position the building models on the site plan.

NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. You position the building models on the site. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . modify their visibility. One building model is a condominium.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. and the other is a townhouse. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . You link two building models to the project. you open a project in which only site components have been developed.Linking Building Models In this lesson. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it. you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed.

and click Properties. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. Click Open. 2 On the File menu. RELATED See the lesson. This option is grayed out. click Save As. select the three files. right-click. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. c_Townhouse. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. in the Model Linking folder that you created. c_Condo_Complex. 4 On the File menu. this system is not exposed to the user.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer.■ Auto .Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. click Open. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. 5 On the File menu. NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. this option will place the link at a predefined location. click Training Files. however. All three files now reside. you can do so.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . and click OK. and save the file there. and open Common\c_Site. Auto . click Close. Select c_Site. Manual . ■ ■ Manual . Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only.rvt. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. with write permission. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. 8 Clear Read-only. click Open. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. Otherwise.

you do not need to change the project units to metric. click Project Units. If you wish to do so. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select Auto . expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. and make your changes. 13 Click Open. 10 In the Project Browser.Origin to Origin. expand Views (all). you can go to the Settings menu. For Positioning. Notice the blue detail lines. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites.NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 11 On the File menu. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units.

15 On the Edit toolbar. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. The linked model moves as one object. After you select it. 16 For the move start point. The first click specifies the move start point. 17 For the move endpoint. The Move command requires two clicks. click (Move). The second click specifies the move endpoint.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 .rvt displays in the Type Selector. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects. Standard move commands work with linked building models.

After you specify the location to move to. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and select c_Townhouse. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. 18 On the View menu.Origin to Origin. select Auto . 21 Click Open. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu. For Positioning. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.

To rotate an object. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. and click to specify the end of the rotation. you first specify the rotation start point. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. click to specify the rotation start point. In this case. Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. click (Rotate). Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 .The townhouse building model displays above the site model. 23 On the Edit toolbar. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. when the vertical line displays.

28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. click (Move).The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point. 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates .

Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . 30 For the starting point. click (Copy). select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. The first click specifies the start point. Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. The Copy command works much like the Move command.The townhouse is located within its required footprint.

34 On the Options Bar. 35 In the Element Properties dialog.A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. click . click Rotate. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. under Identity data. 32 On the Edit menu. enter Townhouse A. for Name. use the Move command to make any adjustments. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. click (Default 3D View). NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. 37 On the View toolbar. 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. 780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and click OK.

NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels. If you have not completed the previous exercise. After linking the files. In this exercise. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. In this exercise. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. 2 On the SteeringWheels. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. In the next exercise. click Save. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model.38 On the File menu. you need this project file open and in this view. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. click and hold Orbit. When you originally linked the files. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. click (SteeringWheels). they were placed too low within the site topography. do so before continuing. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files.

In the steps that follow. To do this. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. and click to select the line. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface.rvt. and click OK. In this case. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. click (Align). move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. and double-click South. 3 In the Project Browser. and click to select it. When using the Align command. Click the Revit Links tab. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. you first select the plane you want to align to. when it highlights. under Views (all). expand Elevations. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 7 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the plane that you want to align.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface.

12 On the View toolbar. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 . click and hold Orbit. double-click North. 14 On the SteeringWheels. click Save. under Elevations. click 13 On the View toolbar. 15 On the File menu. 9 In the Project Browser. This would over-constrain the model. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. (SteeringWheels). Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. 11 Return to the South elevation view. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. click (Default 3D View). and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration.Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment.

or Custom. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. When you link a file. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. do so before continuing. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display.rvt. click the Revit Links tab. click Visibility/Graphics. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. As you can see. click By Host View.rvt. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. detail level. By linked view. display settings. 4 Under Visibility. you can independently control the visibility settings. under Elevations. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. you need this project file open and in this view. 9 Under Visibility. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . expand c_Townhouse. click OK. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. double-click South. 2 On the View menu. click Custom. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. 10 Click OK. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. select <Custom>. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. In the next exercise. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. In this exercise. If the Basics page is set to Custom. 8 For Annotation Categories. scroll down and clear Levels. and the halftone settings for each linked project.

and click OK. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. Using the Custom option. With linked files. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . no detail level changes are required. medium. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. select <Custom>. click the Revit Links tab.rvt. In this case. on the Basics tab. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. 14 On the View menu.rvt. click By Host View. 20 For c_Townhouse. and then set the detail level to coarse. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. or fine.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. click Visibility/Graphics. under Display Settings. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog.rvt. under Floor Plans. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 24 Click OK. By default. select Custom. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu. 16 Under Visibility. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. expand c_Townhouse. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. click the Revit Links tab. double-click Level 1. 23 In the Model categories list. By selecting custom under Model Categories. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. Notice both townhouses display in halftone. You can click the value for Detail Level. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. click Visibility/Graphics.

you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. 31 On the File menu. select c_Townhouse. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. In this case.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. In the next exercise. In this exercise. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. click Custom for the Townhouse link. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. click Save. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. 29 Click OK. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. 25 On the Revit Links tab. With the Show All filter applied. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. All other components are grayed out. 28 Select By linked view for View range. demolished. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog.rvt. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you manage the linked files. In this case. However. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. you need this project file open and in this view. all new. In most cases. click OK. under Visibility. this is preferable. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. By default. and phase filter of a specific link. 26 Under Display Settings. existing. on a sloped site for instance. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. there are situations. phase.

2 In the Manage Links dialog. do so before continuing. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project. 3 Under Path Type. select c_Condo_Complex. the link is maintained. If you have not completed the previous exercise. You learn more about this in the next lesson. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. 6 At the confirmation prompt. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. 5 Click Unload. and Saved Path fields are read only. In a shared coordinate environment. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. click Yes. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. In general. They supply information regarding the links. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. click the Revit tab. 7 Click OK. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. click Manage Links. Locations Not Saved.rvt. 4 Under Linked File. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. Notice the Loaded. The default path type is Relative. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location.

A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. In general. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. 8 In the Project Browser. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. right-click c_Condo_Complex. In these cases. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. If you choose not to open that workset. To do this. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command.rvt. However. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. the link is not loaded. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. click the arrow next to the Open button. expand Revit Links. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. and click Reload. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. click Save As. 9 On the File menu. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. When you initially place the link. you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. and select Specify.

When used in conjunction with model linking. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. and the resulting project files. The host file consists primarily of site components. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. leave the project file open in its current view.10 In the Save As dialog. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. When you share coordinates between projects. In essence. In the next lesson. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. If you have not completed the previous lesson. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. do so before continuing. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. you are establishing a shared origin point. name the file Site_Project. In this exercise. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. and save it as an RVT file. If you intend to complete the next lesson now.

790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click the Condo Complex. As indicated in the Status Bar. click Open. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. and the resulting project files. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. 2 On the Tools menu.rvt and click Open. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. In this case. open it before continuing. 3 In the drawing area. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. When you are working in the host project. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. Linking Building Models on page 772. Select Site_Project. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. If you have closed the project. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files.coordinates are used. do so before continuing. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates. If you have not completed the lesson.

Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. this location is not saved outside of the host project. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. 5 On the Design Bar. On the Status Bar. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. but can have multiple additional locations. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. you need this project file open and in this view. and Lot C. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. In this exercise. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site. click to select it. Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. it is placed at a specific location. However. when the edges highlight. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. select Location 1. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. Lot B. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. even though both models originate from one linked file. do so before continuing. and click OK. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . If you have not completed the exercise. These three locations can be named Lot A.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. You also relocate the shared origin of the project.

notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. under Instance Parameters. and click OK. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Rename dialog. . click Reconcile. select Move instance to. This is a one-time operation. 9 In the Select Location dialog. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. enter Lot A for New. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. click Change. click OK. 12 On the Options Bar. In the Choose Location dialog. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. When constraining a link to a location. Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. 4 Under Value. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click Not Shared for Shared Location. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Not Shared for Shared Location. click . click Rename. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. Record the current position as a location. and click OK. under Instance Parameters. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog.2 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Choose Location dialog.

The second click specifies the move endpoint. Because Lot A is currently in use. By relocating a project. click the Revit tab. and then select the townhouse project. click OK. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. click OK. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. and click OK. This is a two-click process. 26 Click OK. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. you cannot redefine its location. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. When you create a location. and the left townhouse resides at that location. ignore the warning. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. You created the Lot A location in previous steps.Notice the OK button is not active. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. Save locations 21 On the File menu. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. 25 In the Manage Links dialog. select Save. When you release the mouse button. To explicitly save a location. and click OK. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. Notice the OK button is still not active. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. and click OK. Record current position as. click Duplicate. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. make sure Lot B is selected. When you relocate a project. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . or cancel the action. select the second option. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. 19 In the Select Location dialog. enter Lot B for Name. The first click specifies the move start point. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. 23 Click Save Locations. the active location position is moved. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. a warning displays. 30 On the Tools menu. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. click Manage Links. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. 16 Click Change.

36 On the File menu. click Close. 35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. and click OK. In this exercise. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. 34 On the File menu. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. NOTE In the following exercise. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. 33 On the Edit menu.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. select Save. click Save. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you work in one of the linked projects.

Link a project 1 In the Project Browser.By Shared Coordinates. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. For Positioning. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. if other models were linked into the same host. The current active location is Lot A. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. If you have not completed the exercises. When opening the linked file. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on.rvt file. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. In this exercise. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. 2 On the File menu. Because this building model only has one named location. Select c_Condo_Complex. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . click Open. double-click 1st Floor.rvt file. In addition. Click Open. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. do so before continuing. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. select Auto . you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. Also. it is placed automatically within the host project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. under Floor Plans. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model.

and click OK. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. In the next exercise. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. you need this project file open and in this view. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. and click Make Current.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. 6 Select Lot B. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. click Manage Place and Locations. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. orient a view to true north. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. do so before continuing. enter Lot C. click Duplicate. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. and click OK. click Manage Place and Locations. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. In the host file. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Click OK. 3 In the Name dialog. If you have not completed the exercises. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. click OK. you can select Lot C if necessary. under Graphics. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. select True North for Orientation. you manage the shared locations. In this exercise. you create a new location. click View Properties. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . In this exercise.

10 On the File menu. click Open. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. click Close. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. Select Site_Project.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. You can save the file if you wish. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. If you have not completed the exercise. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool.rvt and click Open. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project. On the Options Bar. In this exercise. do so before continuing.

and click Add. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 5 Under Available fields. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. click Schedule/Quantities. and click OK. under Category. select Doors. select Count. click the Fields tab.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

10 In the Element Properties dialog. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Close.8 Click OK. and then click OK twice. In this exercise. select Family and Type for Sort by. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. 14 On the File menu. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. 12 Select Grand totals. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . under Other. expand Schedules/Quantities. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. 13 On the File menu. clear Itemize every instance. right-click Door Schedule. click Save. and click Properties. You have completed this tutorial. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

click OK. select Invert background color. and click OK. click Training Files. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. and set it as your default template. click the Graphics tab. In the first lesson. Finally. you create an office template. notification preferences. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. they are not saved to project files or template files. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. under Template file. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. 803 . click the Graphics tab. 11 Under Colors. and your username when using worksets. you modify the system environment. 10 In the Options dialog. selection default options. In the second lesson.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. These settings control the graphics. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project.rte. 3 In the Options dialog. journal cleanup options. 6 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture. 8 In the New Project dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. Notice that the drawing area is black. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 4 Under Colors. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. click the value for Selection color. which is independent of the project settings. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects.

21 Click File menu ➤ Close. 13 Click the General tab. click Modify. click Training Files. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 15 Click OK. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. click the Graphics tab. click Modify. However. and click OK. and open Metric\m_Settings. click Wall. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. When an error occurs. 19 On the Design Bar. select red. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 14 Under Notifications. select None. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and select the wall. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. 18 On the Design Bar.rvt. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. For Tooltip assistance. click No. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. select yellow. the elements causing the error display using this color. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 26 In the Options dialog. clear Invert background color. select One hour. 22 When prompted to save changes. For Selection color. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color.12 In the Color dialog.

4 Click Cancel. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. notice the list of library names. including your default project template. If prompted. family template files. click Browse. 5 Under Default path for user files. and click Browse to select a template. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. click Browse. click Places. However. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. and click Open. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. Under Journal File Cleanup. select your preferred Save reminder interval. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. you can start a new project with that template. TIP To view a template. click Browse. 2 In the Options dialog. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. select Normal. and family libraries. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . select the folder to save your files to by default. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. Under Username. ■ ■ 28 Click OK.27 Click the General tab. 10 In the Places dialog. 8 Click Cancel. do not save the changes. These files are used in the software support process. centralized. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. Specifying File Locations on page 805. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. click the File Locations tab. This path is set automatically during the installation process. Your login name displays by default. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. For Tooltip assistance. such as in a large. These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. under Default path for family template files. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). you specify default file locations. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 7 In the Options dialog. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. 3 Under Default template file.

An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. and Import dialogs. or families. When you are opening. and click the icon side of the field. and select it as the library path. click (Add Value). and change the name to My Library. and click Open. and you can create new libraries. In the following illustration. templates. Load. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. under Libraries. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. Save. or loading a Revit Architecture file.library names and path. saving. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 11 In the Places dialog.

specify the new location here. and decal image files. 5 In the text editor. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 9 In the text editor. scroll down the list of building industry terms. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 8 Under Building industry dictionary.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. 24 Click 25 Click OK. Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. This path is determined during installation. (Remove Value) to delete the library. Save. 3 Under Settings. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Edit. 19 Click Cancel. and Import dialogs. view the current path. Load. 21 Click the File Locations tab. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. If you work in a large office. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. click the Spelling tab. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. If you want to relocate this path. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 15 Under Library Name. such as bump maps. and click OK twice. custom color files. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . 22 Click Places. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 28 Click OK. click the My Library icon. 23 Select My Library. click My Library. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Edit. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. 2 In the Options dialog. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances.

16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. click Restore Defaults. click Text. You can turn snap settings on and off. delete sheetmtl-CU. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 2 In the New Project dialog. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If prompted. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Training Files. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click File menu ➤ Save. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. In this exercise. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 4 In the New Project dialog. click default template. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. As you zoom in and out within a view. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click OK. 20 Under Personal dictionary. you modify snap settings. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 12 On the Standard toolbar. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis.rte. click the Spelling tab. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. you modify snap increments. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. under Template file. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. click OK. click OK. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 22 In the text editor. 21 In the text editor. 14 Click in the drawing area. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click Modify. work with snapping turned off. 23 In the Options dialog. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. do not save the changes. 18 In the Options dialog. click Browse. 19 Under Settings. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU.11 In the Options dialog. click Edit.

If you do not have a wheel button. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. click Wall. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. If it does not. For example.. 7 Under Object Snaps. 8 In the Snaps dialog. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. click OK. TIP To zoom while sketching. snapping reverts to the system default settings. 10 On the Options Bar. such as ZO to zoom out. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. and enter 500 . While sketching. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . clear Chain. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . zoom out until it does so. and move the cursor to the right. use the wheel button on your mouse.6 Under Dimension Snaps. enter SM.

and specify the wall endpoint. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. and the wall edges. and delete the value 500 . 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. 18 Enter SM. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. If you move the cursor along the wall. Do not set the wall end point. it will snap to the endpoints. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. click Modify. Notice that snapping is once again active.. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. and click Wall. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. the midpoint. and move the cursor to the right. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 21 Move the cursor downward. This is the increment that you added previously. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. and do not save the file. 24 Click OK.

save the project file with a unique name. When you apply a material to an element. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and object styles. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you render a region to observe the changes. lines. Using these options. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . Finally. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. You create and modify materials. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. In the steps that follow.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. and open Metric\m_Settings.rvt. fill patterns. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. click Training Files. annotations. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project.

Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab. Masonry . Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material. read-only library for render appearances. this material provides a starting point for the new material. 9 Click Apply. scale. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. 11 Click OK. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. and click OK. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . The properties describe the color. select Stone. 6 Click Replace. for Class. and texture of the material. The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. In the steps that follow. When you change properties of a render appearance. 2 Scroll down the materials list. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. When a model element is loaded into a project. However. and select Masonry .Fieldstone. The Render Appearance Library is a local. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. and click (Element Properties). These details will display in rendered images. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. In the next exercise. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. 3 Click (Duplicate). You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. and double-click 02 Entry Level. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. enter Masonry .Fieldstone material. and click OK.Stone. Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank.Fieldstone. 10 Click the Graphics tab. In the Materials dialog.

and click OK. 24 In the Type Selector. click Edit. 15 Click Duplicate. 18 For Finish 1. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. select the rear exterior wall. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . 26 On the View Control Bar. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. 25 On the View toolbar. 20 In the Materials dialog. click Model Graphics Style. 19 On the right side of the Material field. 17 For Structure. .Fieldstone.14 In the Element Properties dialog. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. click Edit/New. and click OK. Fieldstone on CMU. click This is the material that you created. select Masonry . 21 Click OK three times. click in the Material field. 23 While pressing CTRL. 16 Enter the new wall name. 22 Select the left exterior wall. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . Creating and Applying Materials | 813 .Fieldstone. click (Default 3D View). and verify that Shading with Edges is selected.Brick.

for Setting. 28 In the Rendering dialog. When finished. In the following exercise. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. under Quality. click Rendering Dialog. 31 In the Rendering dialog.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. select Low or Medium. select Region. click Render. 29 In the 3D view. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. The rendering process begins. select the render region (a red rectangle). 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. 32 In the Rendering dialog. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. and click Rendering.

choose Model. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. m_Settings-in progress. and double-click West. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. click Import. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. click Show the model. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . such as steel. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. and clear Region. Drafting pattern density is fixed. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. 3 Under Pattern Type.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 5 Click New. click Show the model. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. 7 Under Custom. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. 33 In the Rendering dialog. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. Then click Render again. select Custom. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise.rvt. Zoom into the model. expand Elevations. in the Rendering dialog.rvt.

23 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. In the Materials dialog. 21 In the Materials dialog. select Model. under Pattern Type. select fldstn. click in the Material field. click Modify.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click . and for Import scale. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog.Fieldstone. enter . 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 13 On the Options Bar. enter Fieldstone. for Finish 1. click Edit/New. click to select a fill pattern. click 15 For Structure. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. and click OK.Fieldstone material. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 9 Under Custom. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. 22 Click OK three times. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 10 For Name. click OK. click Training Files. (Element Properties). 17 On the right side of the Materials field. 18 Under Surface Pattern. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern.56.pat. notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . click Edit. and click OK.

click (Default 3D View). Controlling Object Styles on page 817. 2 On the keyboard. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. you can set the window frame material to By Category.25 On the View toolbar. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. expand 3D Views. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. TIP If the pattern does not display. Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type.rvt. adjust your zoom settings as needed. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . and double-click 3 Windows. Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. there are often multiple window types within a project. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. m_Settings-in progress. For example.

8 In the Materials dialog. 10 Select the arched window. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 11 On the Options Bar. click (Element Properties). and click . 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click in the Value column. and click 15 Click OK twice. 14 In the Materials dialog. 9 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. click Modify. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. click Edit/New. under Materials and Finishes. under Materials and Finishes. for Trim Exterior Material. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. click By Category (located under the materials list). This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Element Properties). click in the Value column. 5 On the Options Bar. click By Category. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. . for Trim Exterior Material. 13 In the Type Properties dialog.3 On the View Control Bar.

It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. and select Trim. 18 On the Model Objects tab. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. 28 Under Shading. 30 In the Object Styles dialog.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 19 For Trim. expand Windows. or keywords include the word red. select Trim.red paint. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. and click OK. 25 In the search field. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. (Duplicate). When you render a 3D view. descriptions. click OK. for Class. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. for Name. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. select Paint. 23 Click Replace. 29 In the Materials dialog. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. click OK. . The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. enter Trim . and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab. the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . and click OK. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. type red. click in the Material column.

10 For Line Color. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. under Category.rvt. select Roofs. click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. select Red. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. select Roof Line. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. m_Settings-in progress. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. (Default 3D view). 9 In the Object Styles dialog. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click New. is open with the 3D view active. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. enter Roof Line. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. m_Settings-in progress. 33 Proceed to the next exercise.31 On the View toolbar.rvt. Now that you have created a line pattern. 11 For Line Pattern. for Name. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. 7 On the View Control Bar.

12 Click OK. but not the line pattern. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . The line style is applied to the roof in the view. 13 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style. under 3D Views. Notice that the line color displays in this view. double-click to Building. 14 On the View Control Bar.

and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. click Override. select Black. sections. select Solid. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. select Blue.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. 19 For Line Pattern. 20 Click OK. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. For Color. Plans. double-click 03 Roof. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. under Floor Plans. select 5. select Roof Line. 18 For Line Color. For Pattern. for Visibility. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. elevations. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 22 On the Model Categories tab. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select Roofs. 15 In the Project Browser. select Roofs. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. under Category. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

specify the following: ■ For Plane. double-click Site. select 2. enter Zoning Setback. click New. (Line). select Double dash. Notice the site topography and the property lines. 28 In the Line Styles dialog. under Modify Subcategories.25 Click OK twice. 34 On the Options Bar. 33 In the Type Selector. 31 Click OK. For Line Color. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . select Level: 02 Entry Level. click Lines. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. select Red. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click Click (Draw). select Zoning Setback. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 29 For Name. For Line Pattern. This places the line above the topography. and click OK.

select it. Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. 39 Click OK. use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 44 On the View toolbar. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. and then clear Property Lines. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. Modifying Annotations on page 825. click (Default 3D View). 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans. 38 On the Model Categories tab. Expand Site. 43 Click OK. and clear Property Lines. and clear Zoning Setback. 40 In the Project Browser. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. and clear Zoning Setback. double-click 02 Entry Level. NOTE If Site is not selected. 36 On the View toolbar. expand Lines. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

7 Click OK twice. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. 4 Enter the name Linear .Imperial. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. You have created a new dimension style. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. double-click 02 Entry Level. select Linear .Modifying Annotations In this exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. m_Settings-in progress. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modifying Annotations | 825 . and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. for Units Format. under Floor Plans. click one wall. click another wall. Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. For Units. click the default value. click Duplicate. click Dimension.Imperial and click OK. To place a dimension. 9 In the Type Selector. click Modify.rvt. m_Settings-in progress. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active.rvt. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. select Feet and fractional inches. 10 On the Standard toolbar. and place a dimension on the floor plan. (Undo). 5 Under Text. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. and then click outside the second wall.

Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. notice that the label displays 1i. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. clear Leader. 27 On the west wall. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. and select the drop-down arrow that displays.Number. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. click the bottom window. select the 3 window tags. click (Element Properties). 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the preview image. In the steps that follow. Then press Delete. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. 24 While pressing CTRL. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 28 On the Design Bar.14 On the Options Bar. click M_Window Tag .rfa. click Training Files. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. 23 Click OK. Leave M_Window Tag .Number.Number as the assigned tag. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . under Category. 21 In the Tags dialog. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 Click Load. 18 In the Tags dialog. 26 On the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . A window instance tag displays on the selected window. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category.Number is now the assigned tag. 22 Under Loaded Tags. click Tag All Not Tagged. 16 Click Cancel. scroll down to Windows.

select 0 decimal places. verify that Create is clear. click the default value.Temporary Dimensions. 2 In the Project Units dialog. select meters squared. click Modify. m_Settings-in progress. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. 8 Under Walls. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.Temporary Dimensions. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. notice Window Tags appears twice. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. dimensions use these project settings. and click OK.Under Category. Specifying Units of Measurement. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Click OK. 31 On the Design Bar. 9 Under Doors and Windows. 30 Under Leader.rvt. select Faces. Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project. Temporary Dimensions. and Detail Level Options on page 827. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. Unless overridden. M_Window Tag . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 6 Click OK. (Default 3D View). click the default value. Specifying Units of Measurement. and click OK. 4 In the Project Units dialog. you specify the project units of measurements. For Unit symbol. dimension values display using this setting. the other displays the instance value. In the second section. you modify the detail level assignments. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. and click OK. you modify the temporary dimension settings. 3 In the Format dialog.Number. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. select To the nearest 100. 32 On the View toolbar. In the first section. Specifying Units of Measurement. for Area. for Rounding. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. select Openings. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. for Length. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Unless overridden. and Detail Level Options | 827 . In the final section.

Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. In this table. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. click . temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. In this exercise. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. expand Views (all). 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. expand Floor Plans. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. You do not select a view scale to move it. click Training Files. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and expand 3D Views. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Click OK. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium.In this project.

and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . 5 On the Views tab. and click OK. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. select Type/Discipline. expand each view type.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . 6 In the Project Browser. In the Project Browser.Phase 2-Structure West Wing .Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. select Discipline. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click Apply. In the Project Browser. 8 Select Phase. 10 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. notice that views are grouped by phase.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. and click OK. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 . expand Sheets (all). expand both the Architectural and Structural views.

under Sheets. and click OK. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. 16 Click the Views tab. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click New. click the Folders tab. 12 Click the Sheets tab. 14 In the Project Browser. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click OK.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. expand each sheet set. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog.

Creating an Office Template In this lesson. dimensions styles. expand 3D Views. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. 2 Under Template file. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. click Training Files. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. When you create a new template based on an existing template. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. and click Open. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. enter a unique file name. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all.rte template. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment. and click OK. expand Complete. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. View Type (Family and Type). You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. you select the starting point for your office template. When you create new projects. You can also save these settings in a template file. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. For example. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. when you create a new project. In this lesson. Creating an Office Template on page 831. The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. the same rules apply. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. You can choose from several templates. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. Proceed to the next lesson. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. navigate to your preferred directory. you create an office template. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. and expand both Architectural and Structural. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. In that case. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. and click OK. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Creating an Office Template | 831 . under Views. and Discipline. and view names. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. and open Metric\Templates. 21 In the Project Browser. If you want to save this file. click Browse. Whenever you create a new project or template. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. levels. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. In the lesson that follows.

select Project. 12 Under Template File. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. 13 Select the default template. When you create the material. For example. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. If you have additional projects open. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. In this exercise. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. you modify the project settings for your new template. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. If you want to use a template other than the default. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. you can select it now. 14 Click Open. for Create new. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. drag a zoom region around the level heads. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. 15 Under Create new. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. and click OK. select Project template. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. weights. close them. 9 In the Project Browser. and double-click North. in the drawing area. click Browse.5 In the New Project dialog. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. 6 Click OK. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 7 In the Project Browser.

Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. 13 If necessary. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. or modify existing patterns. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. rotate. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 2 Scroll down the materials list. and move model patterns. 4 Click Replace. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. When you create or modify a material. see the previous lesson. including color. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. create new subcategories. see a preview of the rendered material. and scroll through the list of categories. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. or refer to the online help. and materials for model objects. line patterns. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811.During this exercise. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. the changes are saved as part of the project template. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. texture. line colors. you can set line weights. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. You can align. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. You do this by defining the render appearance. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. Observe the materials that are already defined. TIP For more information about creating new materials. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. and similar attributes. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. specific modifications are not dictated. and change render appearance properties. 9 Click OK when finished. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. annotation objects. In the Object Styles dialog. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. Modifying System Settings on page 803. For more details on modifying these settings. If you change render appearance properties. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and imported objects. For more information. transparency. or refer to the online help. create and modify them as needed.

Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. or line pattern as needed. such as section lines and dimension lines. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. select it. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. tags. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. 20 Click OK. click Duplicate. and dimensions. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. To see the details of a particular style.15 Modify categories. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 29 Click OK. modify the line weight. and click Edit. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. name the style. 19 If necessary. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. create new line subcategories. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. and specify the properties. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. 18 For existing line categories. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. and create new subcategories as needed. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. 32 To modify a line pattern. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. You can add and delete view scales. select it from this list. line color. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 34 Click OK. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales.

and choose a decimal symbol. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. and specify the properties. and radial dimensions are modified separately. name the style. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. click Duplicate. angular. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. For example. 53 For Length. To see the details of a particular style. and Angle settings. 60 Under Walls. Linear. click Load. 61 Under Doors and Windows.40 Click OK. click Format. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. TIP In the drawing area. 50 To load new annotation tags. 62 Click OK. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 57 Specify the Slope option. Volume. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. when you add a door with the tag option selected. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. 58 Click OK. 55 Click OK. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. In the Tags dialog. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. select it from this list. and click OK. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. 46 Click OK.

Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. See Setting up If necessary. click the arrows between columns. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. and move view scales as needed. Although these settings can be saved within a template. 65 Click OK. and make modifications in each area as necessary. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. rename.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. rename. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. You can find additional information in Help. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. 73 Click OK. 70 Click the Sheets tab. click the Views tab. Medium. 72 If necessary. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. or edit existing organization types. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. When you create a new view. Use the table below as a checklist. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. The detail level is based on view scale. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. or Fine. or edit existing organization types. Each command is available on the Settings menu. create new browser organization types. 71 Delete. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. 68 Delete. For example. Links to associated tutorials are provided. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. However. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . In such a case. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 69 If necessary. create new browser organization types. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. To move the view scales. Using the arrows between the columns. In a typical project. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. 64 Review the table. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects.

you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. For example. and electrical fixtures. Although this is possible. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. the section cut material. phase filters. However. If this selection is satisfactory. notice the list of doors already loaded. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. modify. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. if you load every available window type. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. you may want to delete. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. title blocks. In addition. For example. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware. You can load any family or group into a template.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. you could load detail components. and the poche depth. you can move onto the next component type. In the steps that follow. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. do so before starting this exercise. If necessary. 2 In the Type Selector. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. or use the Project Browser. there are some important thoughts to consider. you can set up the phases. you do both. furniture. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. or electrical fixtures. Depending on the intended use of this template. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. or add to this selection. click Door. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. you can set the default contour line interval. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. Although the options are endless. If you have not completed the previous exercise. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office.

In the Element Properties dialog. or load a new door type. create. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. and click OK. Make modifications. click Load. or modify a door. and click OK. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. In the Element Properties dialog. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. Enter a name. Click Duplicate. and click Open. and click OK. click Edit/New. create. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify.3 To modify. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. Notice that each family category is listed. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. click Bar. expand Families. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Edit/New. Modify type properties. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. Select it.

Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. you create the views required for your template. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click the component. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template.) 10 Expand the title block. Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. 11 On the Options Bar. This title block is currently part of the template. you created new projects using different templates. (Element Properties). Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. and click Delete. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. To do so.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. 13 Click OK. click Load. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . and select the title block type. Discipline. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. View Range. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. click 12 Click Preview. In addition. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. Detail Level. load. In addition. To load a title block. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. In this exercise. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. create. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with.

select Architectural Plan. open the view from the Project Browser. the view is not linked to the template in any way. double-click Site. 4 If necessary. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click OK.settings of categories and subcategories. In addition. Every time a new plan view is created. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. 12 In the Project Browser. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. and click OK. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. and double-click Level 1. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. you will first modify view templates. click Apply. click Apply. under Elevations. under Floor Plans. In this exercise. 15 In the Project Browser. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. you can apply a view template to any view. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 2 Under Names. select Site Plan. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. At any time. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. double-click Level 2. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. 6 Click OK. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. double-click South. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. 18 If you modified any other view templates. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. and apply the appropriate template. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. After applying the template. 11 Click Apply. and then click OK.

If you want to modify view properties. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. duplicate. under Floor Plans. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. Rename. duplicate. right-click the view name. 27 Create additional levels as needed. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. and. and click Properties. 20 In the Project Browser. right-click the ViewCube.Notice the level names. or delete them as needed. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. or delete this view. (Default 3D View). a face. ceiling plans. under Floor Plans. use the ViewCube. By default. 31 Rename the 3D View. 30 In the Project Browser. or an edge of the ViewCube. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. and elevations. click 29 In the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. click Orient to View. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. right-click the ViewCube. enter a view name. 21 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. right-click the ViewCube. To orient the 3D view to another view. review the floor plans. 22 In the Project Browser. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. To orient the 3D view to a direction. and click Save View. notice that you have the option to rename. Black level heads have no associated views. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. and select the desired direction. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. in the Project Browser. in the shortcut menu. click Level. right-click Level 1. If prompted. 24 On the Options Bar. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. and click Rename. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. and select the desired view. on the View toolbar. review the existing floor plans. Blue level heads have associated plan views. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . expand 3D Views. click Schedule/Quantities. click Orient to a Direction. select Make Plan View. 23 To add more levels to the template. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. If it does not display.

43 Proceed to the next exercise. select one. on the View tab of the Design Bar. select the title block and delete it. and click OK. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. modify settings as needed. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. 42 Create new sheets as needed. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. and click Add View to Sheet. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs.txt for AutoCAD. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. select the category type. and click OK. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. modify settings as needed. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. and modify their properties accordingly. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Right-click the sheet name. modify settings as needed. select the default title block. When you import a DWG or DXF file. On the Filter tab. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. 37 Click OK. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. To later add a title block to a sheet. You are prompted to select a title block. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. in the Project Browser. and click Rename. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. Select a view. or exportlayersdgn.You can add schedules to a template. You can still add views to the sheet. select and order required fields. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . assign filters. On the Formatting tab. On the Appearance tab. click Add View. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. click Sheet.txt for MicroStation). To do so. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory. After the sheet is created. 40 To add views to the sheet. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. expand Sheets (all).

it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. doors. When you create a multi-category schedule. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. 5 For each category. name the file. For example. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). When scheduling. 8 In the dialog. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. and related multi-category tags and schedules. 2 For each category. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. project parameters. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. and click Save. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. and click Save. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. and click Save. Using shared parameters. click Save As. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . therefore. and so on. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. These settings are retained within the project template. for example. You can save these mappings to a text file. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. and they become the set mappings for the project. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. name the file. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. name the file. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. When you import a DWG or DXF file. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. windows. They cannot be shared with other projects. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. 9 Click Save As. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. and so on.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. select Save As. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog.

and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. under Groups. and click OK. add required parameters. 2 Click Create. click Add. and choose a shared parameter. If this template will be used by multiple team members. 6 Create as many groups as needed. 17 Under Discipline. 9 Name the parameter. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 18 Under Type of Parameter. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 5 Enter the group name. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. 14 Click Add. 26 Click OK. 16 Under Parameter Data. you may want to save the file to a network location. 25 Click Select. enter a parameter name.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. select a group to add parameters to. 3 Name and save the file. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. 8 Under Parameters. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 11 For each parameter group. project parameters. 21 Under Categories. for Name. For each parameter group. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 23 Add project parameters as needed. click New. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. select a parameter discipline type. click New. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. 19 Under Group parameter under. select Project parameter. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. If a file already exists. and select Shared Parameter. and specify its discipline and type. because each office has a unique set of needs. 22 Click OK. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. 10 Click OK. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. you can create a list of parameters. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. select a parameter value type. 24 To add a shared project parameter.

For information on creating multi-category tags.27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. or refer to the online help. for Name. and click OK. 37 When you have completed the schedule. you need only select a setting. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. enter a name for the schedule. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. By going first to the Print command. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. you create named print settings. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. you can set options such as sheet sizes. paper placement. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. 32 Navigate to the directory. select Multi-Category. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. The tag is now part of the template. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. and print. and make it your default template file. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. 35 For Name. click Schedule/Quantities. 6 In the New dialog. 5 Click Save As. and click Open. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. you can load them into the template. 2 Under Printer. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 . 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. save the file as a template. click OK. select the tag. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. click Setup. and the percent of actual size. 4 Modify the printer settings. make minor modifications if necessary. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. 34 For Category. In this exercise. 28 Click OK. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. For each printer. By creating named settings within the template. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. Click OK. 3 Under Settings. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment.

In addition. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. and saved them to a template. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. and click Save. select Template Files (*. 25 Click OK. 18 Click Browse. and click Open. 22 Click the File Locations tab. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. You can also set this template as your default template. modify the printer settings. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. 19 Select the template. you ensure that office standards are maintained. and create new settings for this printer. In this lesson. save it in a network location. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. and click OK. By investing the time to individualize your template. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. 20 Click OK. select it. If you need to share this file with others. 23 For Default template file. click Browse. The only remaining task is to save it. In addition. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. click Setup. 14 Under Save as type. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. you modified settings. 9 In the Print dialog.rte). click Save as. select a different printer. If you have a project. 11 Click Close when finished. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 24 Navigate to the template location. This can provide a good starting point for a template. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Create additional settings as needed. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. Your template is complete. 15 Name the template. loaded components. enter a new name for the printer.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. and click Open.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful